SCCPSS – Security Vestibules March 6, 2019internet.savannah.chatham.k12.ga.us/district... · Division 05 - Metals 05420 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Division 06 – Woods and Plastics

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules March 6, 2019

TABLE OF CONTENTS 01 00 00 - 1 of 1

SECTION 01 00 00 - TABLE OF CONTENTS SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

CONDITIONS Division 01 - General

01 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Division 04 - Masonry

04810 UNIT MASONRY Division 05 - Metals

05420 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Division 06 – Woods and Plastics

06105 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

07841 FIRESTOPPING 07842 FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS Division 08 – Doors and Windows

08110 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08331 FIRE RATED COUNTER DOOR 08411 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08801 GLAZING Division 09 - Finishes

09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09512 ACOUSTIC PANELS 09650 RESILIENT TILE BASE AND ACCESSORIES


TABLE OF CONTENTS 01 00 00 - 2 of 1

09681 CARPET TILE (BY SCCPSS) 09913 PAINTING Division 10 - Specialties

10265 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10430 SIGNAGE Division 12 - Specialties

12355 CASEWORK Division 15 – Mechanical (Modify locations of existing systems and accessories)

Division 16 - Electrical

16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16100 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16716 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 16717 COMMUNICATIONS FORIZONTAL CABLING 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16999 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION

END OF SECTION 01 00 00


SUMMARY Security Vestibule Upgrades 01 10 00 - 1 of 2

SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL A. This Section includes the following:

1.0 1.1 Work under other contracts 1.1 1.2 Owner's occupancy requirements 1.2 1.3 Work restrictions

B. Stipulation Regarding Specifications: No provisions in these Specifications shall be construed to negate or diminish any requirements in the Construction Contract, but shall be applicable in addition to those requirements.

C. Use of Existing Building(s): As applicable, maintain existing building(s) in a weather

tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

1.1 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 1.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the project with

separate Contractors on the site per Article 1.3.6 of the Construction Contract. The following separate Contracts have been awarded and the Contractor shall coordinate construction operations as required, or directed, by the Owner:

1.2 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction:

Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Material Completion. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. Design Professional will prepare a Certificate of Material Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

1.3 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.3.1 On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be scheduled during working hours of 7 a.m. to 7 p.m.,

Monday through Saturday. Exceptions may be requested in writing. The Contractor shall observe the reasonable needs of nearby properties for quiet and minimized activity at certain times.

a. Weekend Hours: Except as required by the construction schedule, and as approved in advance by the Design Professional, do not work on Sundays. Any work done on Sundays must be non-disruptive to other facilities on the property and nearby properties, which includes consideration of noise levels.

b. Early Morning and Nighttime Hours: As indicated above, and as limited by regulations and by authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions of noise levels. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As authorized in advance by the Design Professional, and as limited by regulations and by authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Coordination with Campus Police: Access to school facilities during non-school hours shall be coordinated with Campus Police. Contractor shall obtain prior clearance to occupy the site or buildings by calling


SUMMARY Security Vestibule Upgrades 01 10 00 - 2 of 2

Campus Police dispatcher @ 912-395-5536

Contact Campus Police at end of work and ensure facilities are secure and Alarm Systems are activated. d. Tobacco Products (including vaping) are strictly prohibited and not permitted on

Board property. e. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. Notify Design Professional, and Owner, not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Proceed only with Design Professional's, and Owner’s, written permission and only with all written authorizations including permits that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 01100


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1 of 3

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for processing Contract

modifications. 1.2 Requests for Information or Clarification

A. Request for Information (RFI): The Design Professional will issue a written RFI Response to

each written Contractor inquiry. Unless specifically addressed, RFIs and RFI Responses shall not involve any adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. RFI Responses when issued, become a part of the Contract Documents, and as such must be adhered to. The effects of RFI Responses must be reflected in the Project Record Documents. Each RFI Response shall bear words addressed by the Design Professional to the Contractor: “The work shall be carried out according to the following instructions or clarifications issued in response to Request For Information #(enter RFI #), and in accordance with The Contract Documents without change in The Contract Sum or Contract Time. If you determine that this response does affect The Contract Sum or Contract Time, you shall notify The Design Professional immediately, and shall do so prior to proceeding with the work in accordance with this response. Proceeding with the work in accordance with this response without your prior notification otherwise indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in The Contract Sum or Contract Time.”

1.3 CHANGES IN THE WORK AFFECTING COST AND/OR TIME

A. Proposed Change Order Requests: The Design Professional (or Owner) may issue a, which is

detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Each PCO will be numbered and dated, and subsequent communications regarding each PCO should give reference to the PCO number and date. 1. Proposal Requests are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to

stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in PCO after receipt of Proposal Request, the Contractor shall

submit a Change Order Proposal (COP), which is a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. Each COP must give reference to the number and date of the PCO to which it is in response. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Pricing of Changes shall be in accordance with Articles 3.2.9 and 3.2.10 of the Construction Contract.

d. If affected, the Contractor's Construction Schedule shall be updated to indicate the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. This updated schedule shall be submitted with the COP. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. By omission of an updated Schedule as a part of a COP, the Contractor shall and does establish that the Schedule is not affected by the subject change. Any COP that proposes to affect Contract Time may be considered non-



responsive if it does not include an updated Schedule

A. All change proposals shall include complete break-out and support documentation, including

unit descriptions, unit quantities, unit costs (labor, material, other), burdens and mark-ups. Portions of work that are to be deleted as a part of an overall change description shall be clearly reflected in the break-out; abbreviated descriptions which reflect only the net effects of reduced work scopes combined with increased work scopes will not be accepted. The Design Professional and Owner shall have full discretion in determining what measure of breakout and support is adequate and acceptable. No extension of Contract Time will be allowed for Construction delays attributable to the failure on the part of the Contractor to provide properly prepared and supported change proposals.

B. Proposal and change request forms: Use forms that are acceptable to the Design Professional

and Owner. If the Design Professional or Owner deems it necessary, the Contractor shall be required and shall agree to submit change proposals on forms provided by the Design Professional or Owner.

B. Do not reflect any Change Order in the Schedule of Values or Application for Payment

Continuation without an approved Change Order. The Design Professional or Owner shall have full discretion in establishing the manner in which Change Orders are added to the Schedule of Values and Continuation Sheets.

1.4 ALLOWANCE

A. Allowance Adjustment: All charges against an Allowance shall be made in the form of a CO

resulting from PCO or RFI, shall be managed as any CO, and shall be invoiced against the Allowance line item in the Application for Payment. At Project completion, any unused balance in each allowance will be returned to the Owner by deductive CO.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents Submit claims within 14 days of receipt of the Change Order authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 14 days after such authorization per Article 5.2.2 of the Contract.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. The Design Professional shall immediately upon receipt review each Proposed Change Order

(PCO) for its technical and monetary merits. The Design Professional will not forward to the Owner any advice or recommendation for any PCO that does not meet all requirements per Article 3.2.4 of the Contract Documents, but shall instead return it to the Contractor with specific instructions as to what must be done in order to rectify the problems with PCO. The Design Professional will provide written advice to the Owner regarding his opinion of each PCO, which will include a recommendation.

B. Upon Owner's approval of a Proposed Change Order (PCO), Design Professional will issue a Change Order for approval by the Owner.



1.6 FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER A. Force Account: Force Account work shall be undertaken only after receipt of an Approved

Change Order, stating a maximum dollar amount (Stipulated Maximum Sum) beyond which no change work may be undertaken subject to amendment, for funding all costs of the Change Order as prescribed in Article 3.2.7.3 of the Contract.

B. Documentation: The Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of

work required by the Force Account Change Order. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.7 TRACKING, COORDINATION and MANAGEMENT of CLARIFICATIONS and CHANGES

A. Some clarifications and changes will go thru a process whereby they are assigned tracking

numbers as more than one of the type documents defined in the articles above and in other Sections of these Specifications (i.e. RFIs, etc.). All documents created which pertain to the same subject shall make clear reference to other previous or concurrent documents on the subject. 1. The Contractor shall establish and maintain current a single Log which tracks all these

type documents. The form and content of this log is subject to Design Professional and Owner approval, and may if sufficient be used to meet other stipulated tracking log requirements.

1.8 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME DUE TO WEATHER

A. Delays caused by weather are non-compensable, and will be processed in accordance with

Article 3.3.7.2 of the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules `March 6, 2019

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1 of 3

SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record

Documents at Project closeout. C. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked

for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate phase of construction. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit a digital image of all photographs weekly, along with daily

construction reports. 1. Format: as approved by Design Professional.

2. Identification: Each digital image shall have a unique identifier, and shall be

accurately date stamped, or the accurate date shall be ascertainable by electronic file date. Tag and/or transmit the photographs in a manner so as to clearly identify them as photographs of this project. Also, for digital images for which it is necessary or for which requested by the Design Professional, provide a description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

2. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project

Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, un-cropped.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who is familiar with the project and the progress of

the work. 1.4 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested,

including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows.



1.5 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Design Professional and Owner

for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: In format as approved by Design Professional.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to

clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each

photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,

without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at

Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Design Professional.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take , digital photographs

of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Design Professional. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take sufficient photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before

starting the Work. 3. Take sufficient photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to

accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take sufficient quantities of photographs as necessary to

cover all work done in the Work Area. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Additional Photographs: Design Professional may issue requests for additional digital

photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. These additional photographs shall be included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, safely take additional photographs immediately upon request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:



a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Material Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 of 10

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting all project

submittals, including product data, product certificates, manufacturer certificates, test reports, shop drawings, color and finish selection information, samples, and other submittals.

B. See also all other Divisions and Sections for additional submittal information as required by the

Design Professional. 1.2 SUBMITTAL TYPES / DEFINITIONS

A. Each submittal must be identified according to the following submittal types:

1. Informational Submittal: Submittal item that is made for the purpose of supplying required information or information which demonstrate compliance with project requirements. While an Informational Submittal does not require the Design Professional's or Consultant’s responsive action, it may be rejected for not complying with requirements, in which case the item would be required to be re-submitted. Also, in certain instances, corrective work may be required as the result of a rejected Informational Submittal.

2. Action Submittal: Submittal item that is made for the purpose of supplying required information or information which demonstrate compliance with project requirements, and which does require the Design Professional's or Consultant’s responsive action. Except as directed or indicated otherwise, an Action Submittal shall be submitted and approved prior to the commencement of the work to which it pertains.

3. Administrative Submittal: Submittal item that is required as a part of general project management and administration. Most or all Administrative Submittals will be Informational Submittals.

4. Technical Submittal: Submittal item that pertains to a particular aspect of the actual work. Most Technical Submittals will be Action Submittals, although some will instead be informational submittals.

5. Periodic Submittal: Submittal item that is required during the course of construction (such as manufacturing or installation reports). Most or all Periodic Submittals will be Informational Submittals.

6. Job-End Submittal: Submittal item that is required as a part of project close-out, operation and maintenance information, warranties, record documents, demonstration and training, or special requirements associated with Material and Final Completion. Do not submit Job-End Submittals with Technical Submittals. Most or all Job-End Submittals will be Informational Submittals.

7. Component Submittal: Submittal (more accurately, transmittal) of actual components, such as extra materials, tools, parts that are specified to be required. While a Component Submittal does not require the Design Professional's or Consultant’s responsive action, it may be rejected for not complying with requirements, in which case the item would be required to be re-submitted. Also, corrective work may be required as the result of a rejected Informational Submittal.

B. Do not transmit or bind different type submittals together when such would encumber proper

handling or action by the Design Professional; for instance, do not bind Informational Submittals together with Action Submittals.



1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Design Professional may withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received. Failure on the part of the Design Professional to notify the Contractor that action on a submittal is pending related submittals shall not be cause for an extension in the Contract Time.

B. Submittals Schedule/Log: Maintain and periodically submit a Schedule/Log of Submittals.

Coordinate submittal and action dates with the Project Schedule, allowing adequate time {14 calendar days minimum} for review and action by the Design Professional, re-submittal, re-review and action, field measuring, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery. 1. Include for each line entry in the Submittal Schedule/Log columns to indicate no less

than the following information: a. Number b. Section Article Number c. Subject or Description d. Content e. Type Product f. Type g. Date, scheduled h. Date, actual i. Review Action Date, scheduled (for Action Submittals) j. Review Action Date, actual (for Action Submittals) k. Review Action 2. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and

Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submit current updated Submittal Schedule / Logs no less frequently than monthly and

more frequently when required by the Design Professional. C. Identification / Transmittal of Submittals: Use the Project “Submittal Cover / Transmittal

Sheet” form, which follows this Section, to transmit ALL submittal items, without exception. Complete all information on the form, entering “NA” in blanks that are not applicable. For Action Submittals, attach a fully completed copy of the “Project Submittal Cover / Transmittal Sheet” to the front of each and every copy of each and every submittal. A partially editable electronic copy of the “Project Submittal Cover / Transmittal Sheet” will be made available to the Contractor upon request. Submittals that are not properly and correctly identified will be returned with no action, a re-submittal will be required, and attributable delays will not be considered as cause for an extension in Contract Time.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time {14 calendar days minimum} for submittal review,

including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Design Professional's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals.



1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Design Professional will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each re-submittal.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Design

Professional observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. All copies including additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals less three

will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are returned with a review stamp and note by either the

Design Professional or his Consultant that does not indicate the requirement that they be resubmitted.

4. The Design Professional shall be responsible for an initial and one subsequent review of the submittal. The Contractor shall be liable for additional cost of subsequent reviews due to non-compliance.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating a review stamp and note

by either the Design Professional or his Consultant that does not indicate the requirement that they be resubmitted.

J. All submittals shall be made in a manner that will accommodate the progress of construction.

No extension of Contract Time will be issued for construction delays caused by untimely submittals. All Action Submittals and all other submittals that are deemed relevant to the progress of the Work shall be provided according to the approved Submittals Schedule, and all such submittals shall be provided no later than within 60 days of commencement of work or other notice to provide submittals, or within 15% of the project schedule, whichever time period is shortest.

K. If at the time of an Application for Payment, the provision of submittals is behind schedule,

based on the current approved Submittal Schedule, the Contractor may not be allowed to request funds for General Conditions, which, if requested, will cause the Application to be returned without action.

L. If the Agreement allows for the reduction of retainage, this reduction shall not be approved or

allowed until all Action Submittals and all other submittals that are deemed relevant to the progress of the Work have been approved.



1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S CAD FILES

A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Design Professional's electronic drawing

files may be provided on a limited basis to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:

1. The Design Professional assumes no liability for reliance upon these documents instead of actual physical measurements or examination of actual field conditions. The Design Professional's drawings are copyrighted and may not be used for any purposes other than for the construction of this building at this time and place.

2. Each request must include specific information about the intended use of the electronic drawings, and the type electronic drawing file sought, and a list of the specific drawing sheets sought. These will be provided in response to each request at the sole discretion of the Design Professional.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Except as approved by the Design Professional, submit all Action Submittals required by

each Section at one time. Bind and consolidate these to the greatest extent possible, taking care however that each individual submittal requirement is included.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are

not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Product Data in a quantity to meet Contractor's requirements, considering that the Design Professional will retain three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Design Professional's electronic Drawings is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings.



d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit copies in a quantity to meet Contractor's requirements,

considering that the Design Professional will retain two copies. D. Samples: Submit actual material samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a

check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed; photographs of products and/or materials will be rejected… 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit no fewer than five full set(s) of available choices

where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Design Professional will retain three and will return the remaining submittal(s) with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit no fewer than four sets of Samples. Design

Professional will retain three Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written

summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of product schedule or list in a quantity to meet



Contractor's requirements, considering that the Design Professional will retain three copies.

F. Applications for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures." I. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers, including Local and/or MWBE participants: Prepare a

written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include company names, addresses, contacts, phone numbers, fax numbers, and email addresses. 1. Number of Copies: Submit no fewer than four copies of list, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Local and/or MWBE Monthly Report: Submit with Monthly Payment Application on

Forms specified in the original solicitation documents. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Design Professional will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." Instruct all testing and reporting agents to forward copies of all documents directly to the Design Professional.

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project

Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01

Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience

of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Design Professionals and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.



H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and

normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.



3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Photographic Documentation." V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to

Design Professional. 1. Design Professional will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them

for re-submittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Design Professional. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required

submittals, submit copies of a statement, in a count no fewer than that of the shop drawing or other type submittal to which it is in relation, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

All submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Design professional. Submittals that are not fully and properly reviewed by the Contractor will be returned with no action, and a re-submittal will be required, and attributable delays will not be considered as cause for an extension in Contract Time. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.

3.2 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S ACTION

A. General: Design Professional will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval

stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Design Professional will review each submittal, make marks to indicate

corrections or modifications required, and return it. Design Professional will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.



C. Informational Submittals: Design Professional will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-compliant, and will be returned

without review. 1. Should the Contractor proceed with the Work without the required full review of

complete submittals, he does so at his sole risk. In any event and at any time it is determined that a missing portion of a submittal is needed in order to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents; the Contractor shall immediately submit the missing portion. No increase in the Contact Amount or the Contract Time will be allowed, nor will any variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents be allowed as a result of the failure on the part of the Contractor to provide complete submittals, or as a result of the failure of the Design Professional to garner complete submittals from the Contractor.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. F. In no case shall any review action or comments on the part of the Design Professional or his

Consultants be construed to authorize compensable extra Work or an increase in Contract Amount or Contract Time.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control. 1. Except for the expense of inspections and testing required by Chapter 17 of the IBC, the

expense of all required on-site quality-control inspections and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. The Contractor’s responsibility for Quality of Materials and Installation is specified in Article 2.1.4 of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit a written Quality Control program.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Design Professional, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Refer to individual Specification Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Design Professional.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to

verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged; mock-ups shall receive prior, written approval when allowed to be part of the finished work.

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to

verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project

before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing



agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish

different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Design Professional for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Design Professional for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data.



9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities

shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing

the Work. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.



I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Design

Professional. 2. Notify Design Professional seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will

be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Design Professional's approval of mockups before starting the final work,

fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified

in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 16. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified here or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours (or as required by testing agencies) in advance of

time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Design Professional and Contractor in

performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Design Professional and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and



inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special

tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Design Professional and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service to Design Professional with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Material Completion which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION

A. General: It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the testing agency(s)



and inspection authorities to ensure that all required tests and inspections are performed. 3.2 ACCESS TO WORK

A. General: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide safe and unencumbered access for

the Design Professional and other testing and inspection personnel to all locations requiring testing or inspection. This in some cases may require and include the lifting of personnel using power equipment on the project site.

3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for

use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. C. Refer to individual Specification Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products

and installations specified to be warranted. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. It may be in certain instances, but is not necessarily the intent of product Specifications to limit the use of product manufacturers and model numbers to those listed by name. As a minimum, all requirements of the Specifications must be met, including but not limited to in regard to appearance, function, quality, durability, and source reliability. Actions and approvals regarding products and product substitutions will occur in a manner that suits and is in the best interest of the Owner.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.



2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided, or an

explanation why Contractor wishes to provide an alternate material or product. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of Design Professionals and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect

for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results, or because of adverse unforeseen conditions or expenses resulting from the substitution.

3. Design Professional's Action: If necessary, Design Professional will request additional

information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Design Professional will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Design Professional cannot make a decision on use of a

proposed substitution within time allocated. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Design Professional's Action: If necessary, Design Professional will request additional

information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Design Professional will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Design Professional cannot make a decision on use of a



comparable product request within time allocated. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project; product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementations products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.



B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties. C. All warranties that are normally available from manufacturers, vendors, Subcontractors, etc.

shall be provided to the Owner, even if these warranties are not specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

D. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,

that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Design Professional will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Design Professional's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements, as determined by the Design Professional. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements, as determined by the Design Professional. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of



manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Design Professional's sample. Design Professional's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, and textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Design Professional will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Design Professional will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Design Professional will consider requests for substitution if received within 5 days

after the Proceed Order. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the .discretion of the Design Professional.

B. Conditions: Design Professional will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Design Professional will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Design Professional for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

C. Should, subsequent to the approval or implementation of a substitution, there occur a discovery

of an unforeseen circumstance or condition that is attributable to the substitution, the Contractor



shall be responsible to bear any additional costs or to return to the Owner any cost savings resulting from the discovery.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Design Professional will consider Contractor's request for comparable product

when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Design Professional will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of Design Professionals and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of

improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal, if any. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of all utility services

effected by the Work. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical



services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Design Professional. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Design Professional promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Design Professional when deviations from required lines and levels exceed

allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established



by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Design Professional.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of four permanent benchmarks on Project site,

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work

requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real

property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Material Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with

authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Material Completion.



D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Design Professional. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate

progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as necessary. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.



F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Material Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Material Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for

proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Material Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.



D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1 of 3

SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. C. See Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before

the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate

why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Design Professional's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change

their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components

in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Design Professional's opinion, reduce the



building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing and Projected Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces

cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties, or warranties that are set to commence with Material Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to

be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage

to adjoining areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply



with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely

remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 of 4

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.

B. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment

for Material and Final Completion. C. See Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion

construction photographs and negatives. D. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. E. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. F. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel. G. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including but not limited to Section 15 01 60,

“Mechanical Work Closeout,” for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 MATERIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Material

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Transmit keys with a detailed accounting of the keys transmitted, and garner the receipt signature of an authorized representative of the Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems.



9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Material Completion. On receipt of this

written request, Design Professional will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Design Professional will prepare the Certificate of Material Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Design Professional, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final

Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Design Professional's Material Completion inspection list of

items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Design Professional. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty when required by the Scope. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training DVDs. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of this

written request, Design Professional will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Design Professional will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with the site, then the building



exterior then proceeding to the building interior, from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Design Professional for designated

portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Material Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Provide all warranties available from product and system manufacturers, regardless of whether each warranty is specifically called for in these Specifications.

B. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Material Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other



foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and

electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters and clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid

Project of rodents, insects, and other pests when necessary; prepare and issue a final report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or

excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1 of 5

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following per Article 6.4.1; Final Documents, of the Contract. 1. Emergency procedure manuals. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes

systems and equipment. B. Refer to individual Specification Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection.

Design Professional will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Design Professional's comments. Submit

2 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Design Professional's comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Design Professional. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Identify the project name and address on spine of all bindings.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded



oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and

use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY PROCEDURE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency

instructions, and emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for fire, flood, gas leak, water leak, power failure, water outage, equipment failure, and chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type

of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.



C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection

procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of



equipment: D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,

disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training DVD if available, that detail essential maintenance procedures:

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Procedure Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating

procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals. F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation

and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 of 3

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous Submittals 4. Record Documents

B. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. C. Refer to individual Specification Sections for specific requirements for Project Record

Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Submit one full-size [hardcopy] set of red-marked Record Prints; documents shall clearly indicated all field changes that occurred during construction including all addenda or other contract modifications.

B. Record Specifications: Comply with the following:

1. Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Comply with the following:

1. Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

D. Electronic Copies: Using the Record Drawings and Specifications provided by the Construction Professional, the Design Professional shall provide the following 1. Record Drawings: Submit two copies of electronic media (disk, memory card, etc.) in

“PDF” format and “DWG/CAD” format. (Submitted from design professional to SCCPSS) a. PDF drawings to be created with layers that can be turned on and off. (no raster

scan pdf will be accepted). b. Electronic File Naming to be as follows:

i. School letters code-Sheet number.PDF 1. Example for Beach High School – Sheet A1.0:”BHS-A1.0.PDF”

2. Specifications: Submit two copies of electronic media (disk, memory card, etc.) in “PDF” format and “DOC” format. (submitted from design professional to SCCPSS) a. Electronic File Naming to be as follows:

i. School letters code-Specification number-Section Title.PDF 1. Example for Beach High School – Spec. Section 04 23 13 – Brick

Masonry:”BHS-04 23 13-Brick Masonry.PDF”



E. Miscellaneous Submittals 1. Submit one hard copy of any pertinent documents and one electronic copy in PDF Format

F. Municipality Close Out Documents

1. Submit as a record of submittal one hard copy of any documents required by authority having jurisdiction and one electronic copy in PDF Format. a. Submit CAD file in DWG format if produced as part of this contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings

and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints (in red) to show the actual installation where

installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings (in red), whichever is most capable of

showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil/or PDF mark-up. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Material Completion,

review marked-up Record Prints with Design Professional, to assist the Design Professional in preparing a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: “DWG” format Autocad version 2000 or greater. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Resolve any instances of uncertainty with Design Professional.

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Design Professional. e. Name of Contractor.



2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where

applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where

applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

1.5 MUNICIPALITY RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble all paper documents submitted to the authority having jurisdiction. Bind or file these

records with and identifying each for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. Project Record Documents will be reviewed periodically during the course of the project, as a part of the payment authorization procedure.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Design Professional's reference during normal working hours.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules March 6, 2019 PART 1 - SECTION 04810 –UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

1.3 This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Masonry joint reinforcement. 4. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at openings in masonry walls.

2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads of masonry walls.

3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform

texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform

quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction

identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules February 25, 2019

1233 page 04810-1

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry

location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for

lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and

sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover

securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of

other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

3. Coverage shall be complete. Provide additional cover as require to prevent the development of mildew in masonry prior to finishing.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated

loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter

by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products

with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to

prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/TMS 602.


page 04810-2 1233

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce list, the following

requirements apply for product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each face brick specified is based

on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain

percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal

dimensions. 3. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented

by Architect's sample.

2.4 MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with

ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.


1233 page 04810-3

1. Provide Type N for above-grade brick veneer.

B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of

natural sand or crushed stone. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color

necessary to produce required mortar color.

C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

D. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet , with prefabricated corner and

tee units.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Truss type with single pair of side rods.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are

made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,

Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow

vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter,

hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend

within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.


page 04810-4 1233

3. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056,

Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,

accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar

cement, and lime.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and

parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.

4. For above-grade brick venners, use Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine

or coarse) that will completely fill all space intended to be filled. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems

to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


1233 page 04810-5

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to

full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other

Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a

continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of

colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the

following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,

reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with

uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.


page 04810-6 1233

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry:

1. CMU: Match existing [adjacent] bond pattern unless otherwise approved, in writing, by the Design Professional. Joints shall align both vertically and horizontally wherever possible / practicable.

2. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by

lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course

from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and

other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless

otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing

plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of

partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.


1233 page 04810-7

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends

with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints to match adjacent / existing joint profiles when thumbprint

hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum

cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. unless noted

otherwise. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall

openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in

masonry joints and attached to structure. 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically

and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry

progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows using one of the following

methods: 1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when

unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.


page 04810-8 1233

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.8 LINTELS

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 16 inches

for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or

otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep

holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to

remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and

nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A

applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 04810

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Cold Formed Metal Framing March 6, 2019 SECTION 09 22 16.13 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-Structural Cold Formed Metal Drywall Studs and Track. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. E. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process B. ASTM A 1003/A 1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. C. ASTM C 645 - Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. F. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Lavatory Measurements of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. G. ASTM E 119 - ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. H. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. J. 2001 NASPEC for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design steel in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute Publication S100-07 "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", except as otherwise shown or specified. B. Design loads: Design and size components as calculated in accordance with local code. C. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: 1. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/120. 2. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/180. 3. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/240. 4. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/360.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Cold Formed Metal Framing February 25, 2019

1233 page 05500-1

D. Design framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances. E. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with local code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. C. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-structural steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by, and displaying a classification label from, an independent testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1. Construct fire-resistance-rated partitions in compliance with tested assembly requirements indicated on the Drawings. 2. Rated assemblies to be substantiated from applicable testing using the proposed products, by Contractor. 3. Both metal framing and wallboard manufacturers must submit written confirmation that they accept the other manufacturer's product as a suitable component in the assembly. Acceptance is as follows: a. If installation of both products is proper, no adverse effect will result in the performance of one manufacturer's product by the other's products. b. Combining products can be substantiated by required assembly tests. E. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with identification labels intact until ready for installation.


page 05420-2 1233

B. Keep products dry by storing inside under a roof. If necessary to store material outdoors, it must be stacked on pallets off the ground on a level base and fully protected from the weather. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. MBA Building Supplies b. AllSteel & Gypsum Prooducts, Inc. c. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products d. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 DRYWALL STUDS AND TRACK A. General Requirements: 1. Physical properties and load tables have been calculated in conformance with the 2007 NASPEC for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, unless noted otherwise. 2. Drywall framing members have a protective coating conforming to ASTM spec A 653/A 653M, G-40 min, or equivalent corrosion resistance. 3. Reference ASTM specification A 1003/A 1003 M table 1 for the universe of allowable coatings for light gauge steel framing. 4. Drywall framing members are marked with product information per the requirements of ASTM C 645 section 14. 5. Drywall framing, nonstructural 25 gauge, 22 gauge and 20 gauge, is not permitted in load bearing, axial load greater than 200 lbs or exterior applications with a transverse load greater than 10 PSF. Reference ASTM C 645 section 3.2.2 B. Drywall Track: Traditional Full Gauge Flat Drywall Track MBA Building Systems Drywall Track. Non-structural, cold-formed galvanized steel track. 1. Flange Length: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm). 2. Flange Length: 2 inch (51 mm). 3. Flange Length: 3 inch (76 mm). 4. Flange Length: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Web Depth: 1-5/8 inch (41 mm) 162 depth. 6. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth. 7. Web Depth: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) 350 depth. 8. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. 9. Web Depth: 4 inch (102 mm) 400 depth.


1233 page 05500-3

10. Web Depth: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) 550 depth. 11. Web Depth: 6 inch (152.4 mm) 600 depth. 12. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 13. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.48 mm) 18 Mils. 14. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. 15. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. 16. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. 17. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. C. Drywall Studs: Non-structural, cold-formed galvanized steel studs with punchouts for plumbing and wiring installations. 1. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) 125. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Web Depth: 1-5/8 inch (41 mm) 162 depth. 4. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth. 5. Web Depth: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) 350 depth. 6. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. 7. Web Depth: 4 inch (102 mm) 400 depth. 8. Web Depth: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) 550 depth. 9. Web Depth: 6 inch (152.4 mm) 600 depth. 10. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 11. Design Thickness: 0.0158 inch (0.40 mm) 15 Mils. 12. Design Thickness: 0.0200 inch (0.51 mm) 19 Mils. 13. Design Thickness: 0.0232 inch (0.59 mm) 22 Mils. 14. Design Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 15. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. D. Drywall Track: Non-structural, cold-formed galvanized steel track. 1. Flange Length: 1 inch (25 mm) 100. 2. Flange Length: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) 125. 3. Flange Length: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) 150. 4. Flange Length: 2 inch (51 mm) 200. 5. Flange Length: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250. 6. Flange Length: 3 inch (76 mm) 300. 7. Flange Length: As indicated on Drawings. 8. Web Depth: 1-5/8 inch (41 mm) 162 depth. 9. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth. 10. Web Depth: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) 350 depth. 11. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. 12. Web Depth: 4 inch (102 mm) 400 depth. 13. Web Depth: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) 550 depth. 14. Web Depth: 6 inch (152.4 mm) 600 depth. 15. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 16. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.48 mm) 18 Mils. 17. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. 18. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. 19. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. 20. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. E. Slotted Deflection Track: cold-formed galvanized steel in conformance with AISI's Soecification for Design of Cold-formed Steel Members. 1. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.48 mm) 18 mils.


page 05420-4 1233

3. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.80 mm) 30 mils. 4. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 mils. 5. Design Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) 43 mils 6. Design Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) 54 mils 7. Design Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm) 68 mils. 8. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth. 9. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. 10. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. 11. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. 12. Standard leg 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) 13. Standard Vertical Slot of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) throughout leg. 14. Minimum yield strength for 16 gauge (1.37 mm) and heavier is 50 KSI and minimum yield strength on 18 gauge (1.09 mm) and lighter is 33 ksi. 2.3 ACCESSORlES A. Jamb Studs: Cold-formed galvanized steel studs with punchouts for plumbing and wiring installations. 1. Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width 300. 2. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width 350. 3. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. 5. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. 6. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. 7. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 8. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. 9. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. 10. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. 11. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. 12. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. 13. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. B. Jamb and Header System: Jamb and Header System. Cold-formed galvanized steel studs with punchouts for plumbing and wiring installations. 1. Jamb Section: a. Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width 300. b. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width 350. c. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. d. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. e. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. f. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. g. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. h. Design Thickness 0.0346 inch (0.088 mm) Mils. i. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. j. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. k. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. l. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. m. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Header Section: a. Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width 300. b. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width 350. c. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings.


1233 page 05500-5

d. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. e. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. f. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. g. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. h. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. i. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. j. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. k. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. l. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Clip: a. Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width. b. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width. c. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. d. Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. e. Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. f. Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. g. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. h. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (0.68 mm) 68 Mils. i. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. C. Furring Channel: Furring Channel for furring masonry walls and ceiling assemblies or in any other typical wall furring or cross-furring or framing application. Custom furring channel is available on request. 1. Flange Width: 7/8 inch (22 mm) 87. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) 125. 3. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Member Depth: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) 125. 5. Member Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. 7. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. 8. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. 9. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. 10. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. D. U-Channel: Select the size required for the project. If more than one is used, identify the application or location for each on the Drawings or on the schedule at the end of this Section. 1. Size: 3/4 inches (19.1 mm). 2. Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Size: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). 4. Length: Manufacturer's standard length. 5. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). E. Z-Furring: Z-Furring to provide support for insulation while allowing for drywall attachment at masonry or concrete walls. 1. Flange Depth: 1 inch (25 mm) 100. 2. Flange Depth: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) 150. 3. Flange Depth: 2 inch (51 mm) 200. 4. Flange Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250. 5. Flange Depth: 3 inch (76 mm) 300. 6. Flange Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. 8. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils.


page 05420-6 1233

9. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. 10. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. 11. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. F. Angle: Angle for use in a variety of applications. 1. Leg Length: 7/8 inch (22 mm) by 1-3/8 inch (35 mm). 2. Leg Length: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm). 3. Leg Length: 2 inch (51 mm) by 2 inch (51 mm). 4. Leg Length: 3 inch (76 mm) by 3 inch (76 mm). 5. Leg Length: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. 7. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. 8. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. 9. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. 10. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.44 mm) 54 Mils. 11. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. 12. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. G. Flat Strapping: Flat strapping is used for lateral bracing, joist bridging and diagonal bracing to prevent racking. 1. Strap Width: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Strap Width: 2 inch (51 mm). 3. Strap Width: 3 inch (76 mm). 4. Strap Width: 4 inch (102 mm). 5. Strap Width: 5 inch (127 mm). 6. Strap Width: 6 inch (152 mm). 7. Strap Width: 7 inch (178 mm). 8. Strap Width: 8 inch (203 mm). 9. Strap Width: 9 inch (229 mm). 10. Strap Width: 10 inch (254 mm). 11. Strap Width: 11 inch (279 mm). 12. Strap Width: 12 inch (305 mm). 13. Strap Width: As indicated on Drawings. 14. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. 15. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. 16. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. 17. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. 18. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. 19. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.44 mm) 54 Mils. 20. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. 21. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. 22. Design Thickness: 0.1243 inch (3.16 mm) 118 Mils. 23. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. H. Resilient Channel: Resilient Channel for use to reduce sound transmission between the gypsum board and the steel framing member. 1. Web Width: 1.25 inch (32 mm). 2. Leg Base: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 3. Leg Height: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 4. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. 5. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils.


1233 page 05500-7

I. CRC Clip: CRC clips for use to secure cold rolled channel to individual framing members. Each clip is pre-punched ready for quick and easy installation. 1. Leg Length: 1.5 inch (38 mm) by 3.25 (83 mm). 2. Leg Length: 1.5 inch (38 mm) by 5.25 (133 mm). 3. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.44 mm) 54 Mils. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M; unless indicated otherwise. B. Galvanized Coating: CP40 or equivalent coating weight minimum, complying with ASTM C 645. 2.5 FABRlCATlON A. General: Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting. B. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking or distortion. C. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened. D. Provide insulation as specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header members, which will not be accessible to the insulation contractor. E. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before beginning installation, verify that substrate conditions previously installed under other sections are acceptable for installation of metal framing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Verify that rough-in utilities and chases are in correct locations and do not interfere with framing placement. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General Erection Requirements:


page 05420-8 1233

1. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 754. B. Wall Framing: 1. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with the Drawings and the approved shop drawings. 2. Handle and lift prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member. 3. Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved. 4. Provide a sill sealer or gasket barrier between all concrete and steel connections. 5. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or butt-weld or splice them together. 6. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks except when vertical movement is specified. 7. Frame wall openings to include headers and supporting studs as shown in the Drawings. 8. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames, window frames, and other similar openings. 9. Install jack studs or cripples below window sills, above window and door heads, at freestanding stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, securely attached to supporting members. 10. Attach wall stud bridging in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations. 11. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. 12. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. 13. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on Drawings as "shear walls" for frame stability and lateral load resistance. 14. Where indicated in the Drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using a vertical slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 15. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Install extended leg ceiling runners. 16. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces after stud frame erection. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. B. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION


1233 page 05500-9

PART 1 - SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Wood sleepers. 4. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include

the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.


1233 page 06105-1

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by

DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use

chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

Security Vestibule Upgrades for: SCCPSS MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY March 6, 2019

page 06105-2 1233

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit

marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with

a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements

specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit

marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.


1233 page 06105-3

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical

formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber

and the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture

content and the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common

grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and

cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 1. Plywood and dimensional lumber used for roof nailers shall be fire-

retardant treated unless separated from building interior by continuous non-combustible materials.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with

no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the


page 06105-4 1233

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-

preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by

screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with ASTM A 563 hex

nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below

with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593

and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 . 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch .

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed


1233 page 06105-5

for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking,

install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood

Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with

utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with

manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing

materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and

intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

H. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities

as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at

not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.

I. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with

installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

J. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of

preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid

water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid

water.

K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building

Code. L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that

will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or


page 06105-6 1233

will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush

with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-

beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-

size furring horizontally at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring

vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection,

miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


SECTION 07841 – THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations

through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated

constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire

barriers, and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following

ratings determined per UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-

ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and

physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems,

provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width

and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Firestopping March 6, 2019

1233 page 07841-1

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing

and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-

penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration

firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind

of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop

systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting

agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification

marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.


page 07841-2 1233

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1). UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original,

unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent

their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems

when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written

instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that

through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will

become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, Architect and the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include those systems that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Nelson Firestop Products. 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.


1233 page 07841-3

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system

that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other

forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

C. Systems or devices must be asbestos free.

D. Systems or devices shall be listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory under

categories XHCR and XHEZ. System selected shall conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall penetrations.

E. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an

inherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform this function.


A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been


A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-

penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:


page 07841-4 1233

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems

from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1

"Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types

required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the

following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,

accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.


1233 page 07841-5

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation

that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.


SECTION 07842 – FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following:

1. Floor-to-floor joints. 2. Floor-to-wall joints. 3. Head-of-wall joints. 4. Wall-to-wall joints.


1. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems consisting of metal frames and covers. a. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for

systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items.

b. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to

resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.

B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide

systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and L-ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079.

C. Design Requirements: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings

including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.



SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Fire Resistive Joint Systems March 6, 2019

1233 page 07842-1

B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Testing Reports: Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified

testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.


A. Joint system for the entire project shall be detailed by single source. It shall be

the responsibility of the detailer to coordinate with all affected trades. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to

FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

C. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and

construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that

comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting

agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of

qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by

referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.


A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.


page 07842-2 1233

B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when

ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by

natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are

installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the systems that are

produced by one of the following manufacturers may be incorporated into the Work: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Nelson Firestop Products. 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint

substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including

primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.


1233 page 07842-3

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint

systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could

interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of

developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint

system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types

required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to

produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing

materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by

joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish

to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint


page 07842-4 1233

system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation

that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions:

Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Vendor to thoroughly schedule the project to

maintain fire resistant assemblies for construction types and fire rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 1. Joints shall be Type “D” at expansion joints. or at joints with dissimilar

materials. 2. Joints at other location shall be Type “S” or “D” as determine by Vendor.

C. Floor-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. UL-Classified Systems: As selected by vendor for wall and floor construction indicated.

2. Assembly Rating: 1 or 2 hours as indicated. 3. Joint Width: 1 inch.

D. Head-of-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. UL-Classified Systems: As selected by vendor for wall and deck

construction indicated. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 or 2 hours as indicated. 3. Joint Width: 1 inch.

E. Wall-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. UL-Classified Systems: As selected by vendor for wall construction

indicated. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 or 2 hours as indicated. 3. Joint Width: 1 inch.


SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those

specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between different materials. c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of

doors, windows and louvers. d. Penetrations of exterior horizontal and vertical surfaces. e. Building expansion joints as indicated. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of

exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry,

concrete, walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of

interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and

counters. f. Other joints as indicated.

B. Related Sections include the following where applicable to the project:

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.

3. Division 8 Sections "Glazing" and/or "Hurricane-Resistant Glazing" for glazing sealants.

4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.

5. Division 9 Section "Tiling" for tile control and expansion joints. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and

airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Joint Sealants March 6, 2019

1233 page 07920-1

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a

single manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming

and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

D. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant

manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been

removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of

elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding

sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and


page 07920-2 1233

compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by Tremco or comparable products by the following: 1. Dow Corning Corporation. 2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc. 3. Pecora Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that

are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated

for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for

joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

C. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Spectrem 2 as manufactured by Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per

ASTM C 1248. 6. Tremco Dymeric FC is acceptable.

D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Tremsil 200 White as manufactured by Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25.


1233 page 07920-3

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Tremflex 834 as manufactured by Tremco. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are

compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a

surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by

sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to

manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint

sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been



page 07920-4 1233

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere

with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include, but are not limitedto, the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-

sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Secondary Seal: Prime joint substrate. Apply waterstop strip to comply with

manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation

instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for

use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.


1233 page 07920-5

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at

the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work

progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with

contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Exterior and interior joints, expansion joints, control joints and other joints where movement of joint is anticipated: 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Provide secondary seal at joints at concrete panels. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Limit of

six colors. B. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and

counters: 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant acid-curing silicone

sealant. 2. Color: White.

C. Interior joints between wall surfaces and adjoining countertops, penetrations of

walls and partitions for piping, ductwork and similar items, and around perimeter


page 07920-6 1233

of interior door frames, and other locations where movement of joint is not anticipated. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range. END OF SECTION 07920

SECTION 08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Standard hollow-metal steel doors. 2. Standard hollow-metal steel frames.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for building anchors into and grouting standard steel frames in masonry construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazed lites in interior steel doors and frames.

3. Division 8 Section “Hurricane Resistant Glazing” for glazing in exterior steel doors and frames.

4. Division 8 Section “Finished Hardware” for door hardware for standard steel doors and frames.

5. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for non-masonry partition framing.

6. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting standard steel doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core

descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed

by a qualified testing agency, for each type of standard steel door and frame. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Code Compliance:

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Hollow Metal Doors & Frames March 6, 2019

1233 page 08110-1

1. Products specified herein shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the 2102 International Building Code –Hurricanes Prone Regions and Wind-Borne Debris Region requirements. a. When the requirements of the code exceed those specified herein,

the code requirements shall be furnished at no additional costs to the Owner.

b. When the requirements of this section exceed the code requirements, the requirements of this section shall govern.

c. Submit evidence of compliance with code requirements as required by local officials.

2. Products shall comply with applicable Dade County Protocols.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to

ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and

labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. After 5 minutes into

the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection

during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical

position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide

minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication

and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made

without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating standard steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.


page 08110-2 1233

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FRAMES AND DOORS

A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENGAGE THE SERVICES OF AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY TO FIELD CHECK, FROM RANDOM UNITS SUPPLIED FOR THIS CONTRACT, FOR CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Test results shall be submitted to the Contractor, Architect and Owner. If the initial sampling fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, all doors and frames shall be verified: 1. All exterior doors and frames shall be verified for material thickness,

galvanization, mortar boxes, and other requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. A minimum of 15% of interior doors and frames selected at random shall be verified for material thickness and other requirements of the Contract Documents. a. All interior doors and frames shall be tested if random sampling

does not meet the requirements of the Contract. 3. PAYMENT WILL NOT BE AUTHORIZED FOR INSTALLED OR STORED

MATERIALS UNLESS TEST REPORTS HAVE BEEN RECEIVED. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Curries M or comparable product by the following:

1. Ceco SU 2. Steelcraft F

2.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a

qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at pressure as required by local code according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.4 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES


1233 page 08110-3

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2 1. Doors: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness

indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8. a. Basis-of-Design Product: 707 Series as manufactured by Curries. b. Design: Flush panel. c. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. d. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, 18 ga

1). Edges Construction: Model 2, Seamless - Continuous weld, grind smooth, fill and touch-up paint.

2). Beveled edge unless square edge is indicated. a). Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches .

e. Core Construction: 1). Non-Rated Core: Honeycomb. (Foam core for exterior) 2). Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection

ratings indicated. f. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-

thick end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. g. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Frames:

a. Type: Equal rabbeted. b. Basis-of-Design Product: M / MK / DEM; wrap-around frames as

manufactured by Curries. c. Materials: Uncoated [cold-rolled] steel sheet, minimum thickness

as follows: 1). 48 inches in width or less: 16 ga unless otherwise

indicated. 2). Greater than 48 inches in width: 14 ga unless otherwise

indicated. d. Construction: Continuous face welded, dressed and ground

smooth, prime paint 3. Exposed Finish: Primed.

a. Electrified Openings: Doors shall be pre-wired with sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex type standardized plug in connectors to accommodate up to twelve wires.

2.5 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for

materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3:

1. Doors:


page 08110-4 1233

a. Basis-of-Design Product: 707 Series as manufactured by Curries. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 16 ga, with minimum A60

coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Polyurethane.

1). Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 10.04 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

2. Frames: a. Type: Equal rabbeted. b. Basis-of-Design Product: M Series as manufactured by Curries. c. Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 14 ga, with minimum A60

coating. d. Construction: Continuous face welded, dressed and ground

smooth, primed frames shall include shipping bar at bottom to insure frame integrity during shipping. All shipping bars shall be removed prior to frame installation. Install frames per manufacturers and SDI (Steel Door Institute) standards and instructions.

e. Fire rated frames require metal applied label indicating rating designation.

f. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware and cut-out, drilled and tapped to receive mortised hardware.

g. Electrified Openings: Doors shall be pre-wired with sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex type standardized plug in connectors to accommodate up to twelve wires.

h. Metal framed doors installed in masonry walls will have jams and lintels completely grouted to the masonry to avoid hollow spaced between masonry and door frames.

3. Exposed Finish: Primed.

2.6 HOLLOW-METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow-metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as

adjacent door assemblies.

2.7 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud Type Walls: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frame, not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe


1233 page 08110-5

spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners.

2.8 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Sections "Glazing" and "Hurricane-Resistant Glazing".

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble


page 08110-6 1233

units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Standard Steel Doors:

1. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 2. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures,

except provide flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets.

3. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

5. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where

required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

7.

C. Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and

make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face

seams or joints; fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in concrete or masonry.

5. Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1). Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height. 2). Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height. 3). Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches in height. 4). Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb

for each 24 inches or fraction thereof more than 120 inches in height.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1). Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2). Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3). Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4). Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb

for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.


1233 page 08110-7

5). Two anchors per hand for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

7. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

8. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door

silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door

silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare standard steel doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and

surface-mounted door hardware. Reinforce frames for both regular arm and parallel arm closers.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings

such that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on exterior of doors and frames.

G. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as

door face sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer

than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer

than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 3. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067

inch thick. 4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.

a. All exterior doors shall have their tops and bottom edge closed, welded flush with metal matching faces. Provide weeps in bottom edge.


page 08110-8 1233

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.

B. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent

Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below

immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-

free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard steel doors and frames. 1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual

locations of standard steel frame connections before frame installation. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been


A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.

B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely

brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a

perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.


1233 page 08110-9

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors, sidelights,

borrowed lights, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely

until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to

NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or

handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after

frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are

constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead

of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

4. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral – fiber insulation behind frames.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on

a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a

horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners

of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within

clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch .


page 08110-10 1233

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch .

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch .

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch .

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c., and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately

before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames

immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

D. Galvannealed Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair

paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110

SECTION 08211 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing.


1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge

construction, louvers, and trim for openings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for

Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: All doors are to comply with postitive pressure listing

“Category A”. All required intumescent or seals shall be provided by the wood door supplier.

2. Oversize, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide oversize fire door label or certificate of inspection, from a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, stating that doors comply with requirements of design, materials, and construction.

3. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules FLUSH WOOD DOORS March 6, 2019

1233 page 08211-1


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop

Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer,

Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date

of Substaintial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of Installation.


A. Basis-of-Design Product: GPD Series as manufactured by Graham or comparable product by the following: 1. Eggers. 2. Marshfield.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species and Cut: White birch, rotary cut. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated

only by mullions. 6. Stiles: Same species as faces. 7. Plys: Five or Seven


page 08211-2 1233

2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:

1. Core: Particleboard @ non-rated and 20-minute rated openings. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to

eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire

unit abrasive planed before veneering.

B. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face

indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated.

2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated. a. Provide wood blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting

hardware if allowed by code. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard

laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer.

4. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals for pairs of fire-rated doors, unless otherwise indicated. a. Steel edges and astragals may be omitted if door pairs has been

tested for required rating without steel edges. b. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as

doors.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.0478-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following

uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for

fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify

dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for

hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. 3. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable

requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.


1233 page 08211-3

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and

fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

2. Finish doors at factory.

B. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI TR-6/UV catalyzed polyurethane system. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Semigloss.


A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's

written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to

NFPA 80.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Coiling Counter Fire Doors March 6, 2019

08331-

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Overhead coiling counter fire doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening.

B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood jamb and head trim.

C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Product Requirements for cylinder core and keys.

D. Section 09900 - Painting: Field applied finish.

E. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes: Conduit from electric circuit to door operator and from door operator to control station.

F. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Power to disconnect.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,

Plate, and Flat Bar.

C. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

F. NFPA-80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 and listed in UL Directory or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed) Directory.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Details of construction and fabrication. 4. Installation methods.


08331-

C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans and elevations, details of framing members, anchoring methods, clearances, hardware, and accessories.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum

size 6 inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency,

and periodic adjustments required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Company approved by

manufacturer, specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience, with IDEA Certified Installers and service technicians on staff.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry.

C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed materials.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s two year limited warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-


08331-

7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: [email protected].

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER FIRE DOORS

A. Overhead Coiling Counter Fire Doors: Model 640 Counter Fire Doors. a. FM 1-1/2-Hour Class B Label when installed on 2-hour fire-rated

gypsum dry walls. 2. Curtain: Interlocking slats, Type F-158 fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized

steel. Endlocks shall be attached to ends of alternate slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement.

3. Glazing: Fire-rated vision panels, four panels 3 inch by 5/8 inch (76 by 16 mm).

4. Finish: a. Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood galvanized steel to ASTM A 653

finished with a rust-inhibitive roll coating process, including bonderizing, a 0.2 mils thick baked prime paint, and a 0.6 mils thick baked top coat. 1) Polyester Top Coat.

(a) Gray polyester. (b) Tan polyester. (c) White polyester. (d) Brown polyester.

2) Powder coat: PowderGuard (a) PowderGuard Premium: Weather resistant polyester

powder coat color as selected by the Architect. (b) PowderGuard Weathered Finish: Industrial textured

powder coat provides a thicker, more scratch resistant coat. Applied to entire door system including slats, guides, bottom bar and head plate.

b. Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall be black powder coated.

5. Bottom Bar: a. Single black powder coated steel angle bottom bar. b. Single black powder coated steel angle bottom bar with 1/4 inch (6

mm) foam astragal. c. Tubular locking bottom bar.

6. Guides: a. Roll-formed black powder coated steel shapes. b. Roll-formed black powder coated steel with brush smoke seals. c. Finish: PowderGuard Weathered finish with iron/black powder. d. Finish: PowderGuard Zinc Finish for guides, bottom bar and head

plate. e. Fastening Guides to Masonry Fire Walls: UL listed expansion anchors,

or by through-bolts on soft brick or hollow block walls, or by bolts on steel jambs.

f. Fastening Guides to Non-Masonry Fire Walls: Comply with the manufacturer’s listing.

7. Brackets: Black powder coated steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood.


08331-

8. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel.

9. Manual Operation: a. Manual push. b. Crank operation. c. Sensing Edge Protection:

1) Electric sensing edge. 2) Monitored electric sensing edge for momentary contact

controls. 10. Automatic Closure:

a. Standard Fire Door: UL approved release mechanism equipped with a 165 degree fusible link.

b. Fire Sentinel time-delay release mechanism provides an added measure of safety to control the doors' closure.

11. Locking: a. Two interior bottom bar slide bolts for manually operated doors. b. Cylinder lock for manually operated doors. c. Interior slide bolt lock for electric operation with interlock switch. d. Cylinder lock for electric operation with interlock switch.

12. Wall Mounting Condition: a. Face-of-wall mounting. b. Between jambs mounting.

13. Plastic Laminated Fire Rated Countertops: Provide counter fire doors with Overhead Door Corporation plastic laminated fire rated countertops. a. Label: Plastic laminated fire rated countertops shall bear Warnock

Hersey International 1-1/2 hour label for countertops up to 8 feet by 4 feet (2.44 m by 1.22 m). Sizes over 8 feet by 4 feet (2.44 m by 1.22 m) will bear an Warnock Hersey International Oversize Label.

b. Shape: Provide shape as indicated on the Drawings. To include: I or T copable for face mounted doors; Rectangular H (no cope), I or T copable for between mounted doors. No aprons or additional pieces shall be allowed.

c. Core: Interior core of Georgia Pacific Firestop composite and high density particleboard.

d. Finish: Top, bottom and all edges shall be covered with plastic laminate.

e. Color: Top and all edges as selected by the Architect from any color from Formica, Wilsonart or Nevamar brands of plastic laminate.

f. Mounting Hardware: Provide with all necessary mounting hardware. 2.3 FIRE SENTINEL TIME-DELAY RELEASE

A. Model FSBX24V Release Device with Battery Back-Up: For non-motorized doors with voltage input of 24VDC. 1. Capable of holding and releasing up to a 40 lb. load imposed by a fusible

link/sash chain assembly attached to a release mechanism within the door construction.

2. Provide with an internal battery backup system capable of providing up to 24 hours of battery power to support alarm logic, smoke detector, release capability and audible and visible signaling appliances. Device shall monitor battery charge and annunciate the need for battery replacement via an integral sounder; a green, enclosure-mounted LED that indicates the presence of the battery backup system.


08331-

a. Battery backup/power system shall contain a management system providing trickle charge capabilities.

b. During a power outage, and upon depletion of the battery, the device will initiate door closure by releasing the fusible link/sash chain assembly and initiating gravity closure of the door.

c. A DIP-switch selectable feature shall provide the capability of operating on battery power upon loss of line power or closing the door through the release of the fusible link assembly initiating gravity closure of the door

3. Includes DIP-switch selectable delay settings of 10, 20, or 60 seconds upon alarm activation to allow for passageway clearance before initiating door closure.

4. Capable of receiving an alarm input from compatible 2-wire normally open smoke detectors, 4-wire normally open smoke detectors, or normally open heat detectors, or input from a fire alarm control panel via a relay module providing a Form C dry contact output to the release device. a. Capable of receiving input from a maximum of two smoke detectors. b. Use with an End-of-Line (EOL) device to ensure the integrity of the

wiring 5. Provide with optional audible and visual signaling appliances to operate

during the alarm closing cycle. Device shall be capable of activating and powering a maximum of two audible/visible notification devices, e.g. strobes, horns or horn/strobes. Device shall recognize that the door is in the closed position via input received from a proximity switch, located underneath the door and activated when the door is in the closed position and resting upon the switch, to prevent accidental release of the fusible link/sash chain (or 1/16th cable) assembly; an amber, enclosure-mounted LED shall indicate activation of the proximity switch.

6. Provide with relay and trouble outputs to provide notification to a fire alarm control panel when an alarm or trouble state exists.

7. Circuit board shall have diagnostic LEDs to assist with field installation by indicating alarm or trouble conditions present within the smoke detector loops, as well as activation of the proximity switch.

8. Includes an enclosure-mounted test switch that simulates an alarm condition when depressed and held for a length of time equal to the DIP-switch selectable delay setting, either 10, 20, or 60 seconds. A remote key test switch is also provided to simulate an alarm condition during testing procedures.

9. Upon successful test completion of door closure through the operator with no obstructions encountered, the release device shall offer the DIP-switch selectable feature of allowing automatic open after the test input is cleared.

10. Release device shall offer a dry contact relay that may be used to activate signaling appliances or other external signaling functions.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.

B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed.


08331-

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install rolling counter fire doors in compliance with requirements of NFPA 80. Test fire-release system and reset components after testing.

C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and

building framing without distortion or stress.

D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only.

E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth

operation.

F. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 16150. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.

G. Install and test Fire Sentinel release device(s) in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with applicable regulations and codes of the local authority having jurisdiction.

H. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as

specified in Section 07900.

I. Install perimeter trim and closures. 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion.

B. Release device(s) shall be tested and witnessed for proper operation with the door

manufacturer recommendations

C. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Functional testing of fire door and window assemblies shall be performed by IDEA Certified personnel with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subject to testing.


08331-

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove labels and visible markings.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior aluminum-framed storefront. 2. Exterior aluminum-framed storefronts. 3. Exterior manual swing aluminum doors.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section.

3. Division 8 Section "Hurricane-Resistant Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section.

4. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for hardware to the extent not specified in this section.


A. Code Compliance:

1. Products specified herein shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the 2012 International Building Code-Hurricane Prone Regions requirements. a. When the requirements of the Code exceed those specified

herein, the Code requirements shall be furnished at no additional costs to the Owner.

b. When the requirements of this section exceed the Code requirements, the requirements of this section shall govern.

c. Submit evidence of compliance with Code requirements as required by local officials.

2. Products shall comply with applicable Dade County Protocols. B. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of

withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but

not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Aluminum Storefront System March 6, 2019

1233 page 08411-1

5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by

thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural

movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other

components. f. Sealant failure. g. Structural Loads:

6. Wind Loads: As required by local codes. 7. Seismic Loads: As required by local codes.

C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch whichever is smaller.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested

according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems

do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design

pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that

do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 1. Maximum Water Leakage:According to AAMA 501.1 Water controlled by

flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage.


page 08411-2 1233

H. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed

glazing and framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.56 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for

draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and

performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed

systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes

requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect,

except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board’s “Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guildelines for Building and Facilities (ADAAG).” ICC/ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.”


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-

framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made

without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with


1233 page 08411-3

fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials

beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components to function properly.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, the

following: 1. Exterior Framing: IR 501UT (high traffic) thermally broken framing system

as manufactured by Kawneer. 2. Interior Framing: Tri-Fab 450 (high traffic) non-thermally broken framing

system as manufactured by Kawneer. 3. Exterior Doors: 350 IR non-thermal, center-glaze units as manufactured

by Kawneer. 4. Interior Doors 350 non-thermal, center-glazed units as manufactured by

Kawneer.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, products by the following are acceptable: 1. Tubelite Division, Indal, Inc 2. YKK AP America Inc. 3. Old Castle

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to


page 08411-4 1233

recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing

members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermal for exterior applications

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,

nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

D. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by

manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Sections “Glazing” and "Hurricane-Resistant

Glazing at all openings from 7’-0” a.f.f. and below.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

2.5 DOORS

A. Doors: Manufacturer’s standard glazed doors, for manual swing operations. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-

inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors

separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 8-inch top, middle & bottom rails, 5-inch side styles nominal width.


1233 page 08411-5

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.6 DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance

system and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. 1. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (required to open door to minimum required width.

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf. B. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

C. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with

concealed fasteners on mounting strip. D. Thresholds: Raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with

maximum height of 1/2 inch. 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as

specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have

the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and

framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view

to greatest extent possible.

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).


page 08411-6 1233

D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using head-and-sill-receptor system with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members description.

E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation

and for installing hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication. Clearly mark components to identify their location in Project

according to Shop Drawings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion

and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.


1233 page 08411-7

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic

action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and

grades, without warp or rack.

F. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contract points. 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and

weathertight closure. 2. Field Installed Hardware: Install surface mounted hardware according to

manufacturer’s written instructions using concealed fasteners to the greatest extent possible.

G. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"

and to produce weathertight installation.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8

inch in 12 feet, 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch .

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers’ written instructions. 1. For doors accessivle to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide

a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge.

3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

See Drawing Sheets for Door Schedules


page 08411-8 1233


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Door Hardware March 6, 2019 SECTION 08710 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 PREAMBLE

A. Prior to installation of hardware, the project architect shall contact the

manufacturers’ representatives to arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractors’ personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. Seminars shall be attended by installers of hardware (including electrical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples. 1. Pre-installation specifically for electronic door hardware is required.

B. The manufacturer’s representative(s) for the life safety and security products shall inspect and approve the installation of the products they represent. Any identified installation or product issues shall be directed to the attention of the Architect for the purpose of generating the final punch list.

C. Door hardware supplier must be certified to install their product and must perform all installation of said product. This includes readers, door position switches, electronic locks and electric latch retraction devices.

D. THE PROJECT SCHEDULE MUST INCLUDE ACTIVITY(IES) FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM BY OTHERS, FOR COMPLETION ON OR BEFORE THE MATERIAL COMPLETION DATE, ALLOW 60 DAYS. PRIOR TO THE DATE ON WHICH THE ACCESS CONTROL WORK (NIC) IS TO BEGIN, THE GC SHALL PROVIDE A STATEMENT CETIFYING THAT ALL ELECTRONIC HARDWARE WORK HAS BEEN PROPERLY INSTALLED AND FULLY TESTED.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors. b. Cylinders for doors specified in other sections.

B. Commercial hardware includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Electromechanical door hardware power supplies, back-ups and surge

protection.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Door Hardware March 6, 2019

1233 page 08710-1

2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals and integral intumescent seals provided as part of labeled fire-rated assemblies.

3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door hardware, as indicated.

4. Division 13 - Section "Access Control System" for access control devices to be installed in conjunction with door hardware.

5. Division 16 Sections for connections to electrical power system, fire alarm and for low-voltage wiring work.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Standards of the following as referenced: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) 3. Factory Mutual (FM) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. Warnock Hersey

B. Regulatory standards of the following as referenced:

1. Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, Americans with Disabilities Act, Public Law 101-336 (ADA).

2. Chapter 120-3-20, Georgia Accessibility Code, current edition. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. The Contractor shall submit Finish Hardware Schedule PREPARED BY A

COMPETENT ARCHITECTURAL HARDWARE CONSULTANT (AHC) for the entire project in one submittal complete with all catalog cuts. a. Architect's review of the schedule will not relieve the hardware

supplier of the responsibility to furnish hardware in all quantities required and in conformance with the all applicable codes and the Contract Documents.

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

B. Schedules:

1. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated,

organize schedule into vertical format "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Use specification Heading numbers with any variations suffixed a, b, etc. Include the following information: 1). Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware

item.


page 08710-2 1233

2). Name and manufacturer of each item. 3). Location of each hardware set cross referenced to

indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

4). Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

5). Mounting locations for hardware. 6). Door and frame sizes and materials.

2. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

C. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared

for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.


A. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of

door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

B. System Operational Descriptions: Complete system operational narratives for the access controlled openings defining the owner's prescribed requirements for the opening functionality. Narratives include, but are not limited to, the following situations: normal secured/unsecured state of door; authorized access; authorized egress; unauthorized access; unauthorized egress; fire alarm and loss of power conditions, and interfaces with other building control systems.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication and control of electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: 1. Complete (risers, point-to-point) system block wiring diagrams. 2. Location of all above-ceiling electronic hardware devices including power

supplies and wire terminations must be identified on a drawing and submitted jointly to the Architect and Owner for prior approval.

D. Qualification Data:

1. Submit certification for Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Submit qualification data for installer. 3. CERTIFICATIONS: SUBMITTAL RECEIVED WITHOUT QUALIFICATION DATA

SHALL BE RETURN WITHOUT REVIEW. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Code Compliance: 1. Products specified herein shall be furnished and installed in accordance

with the 2006 International Building Code –Hurricanes Prone Regions requirements. a. When the requirements of the code exceed those specified herein,

the code requirements shall be furnished at no additional costs to the Owner.


1233 page 08710-3

b. When the requirements of this section exceed the code requirements, the requirements of this section shall govern.

2. Submit evidence of compliance with code requirements as required by local officials.

B. Supplier Qualifications:

1. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

2. The finish hardware supplier shall be a factory authorized distributor with office and warehouse facilities within a 50 mile radius of Chatham County, Georgia.

3. The finish hardware supplier shall have a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

4. The finish hardware supplier shall employ an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation. a. It is the responsibility of the AHC to detail the entire project

thoroughly to assure a complete installation. 1). Provide any special mounting plate, drop shoe, shim kit,

adapter or other item necessary for the coordination of the hardware installation.

2). Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently

certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

D. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock

manufacturer.

E. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction whether scheduled or not. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

F. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door

assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested

pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.


page 08710-4 1233

G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Access control hardware must be compatible with Cisco Physical Access

Manager version 1.2.

H. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

I. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route,

comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and the Georgia Accessibility Code. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or

twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbs. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

J. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Required Attendee: a. Owner. b. Contractor. c. Architect. d. Installer. e. AHC of record. f. Owner security consultant. g. Electrical Contractor. h. Representative of other trades as determined by Architect, Owner

or Contractor. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of

materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 4. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 5. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 6. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received

by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.


1233 page 08710-5

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and

hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).

E. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately

replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control

with Owner's security consultant.

C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metal, metal finishes, and other materials

beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from the date of Substantial Completion,

except as follows: a. Door Closers: Ten years from the date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: 3-year period. c. Other Hardware: 1 year period. d. Mortise Locks and Latches: 10 years. e. Electromechanical Door Hardware: 2 years.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.


page 08710-6 1233


A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MORTISE HINGES

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: McKinney Company or comparable product by the following: 1. Bommer 2. Hager

B. Basis-of-Design Products:

1. Hollow Metal: a. Exterior:

1). Standard Weight Full Mortise Stainless Steel: TA2314. 2). Heavy Weight Full Mortise Stainless Steel: T4A3786.

b. Interior: 1). Standard Weight Full Mortise Steel: TA2714. 2). Heavy Weight Full Mortise Steel: T4A3386.

2. Wood Doors: a. Standard Weight Half Surface Steel: TA2772.

C. Description: 1. Templates: Provide only five-knuckle, ball-bearing, template-produced

units. a. Hinge pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as

follows: b. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins and safety stud

feature. c. Interior Doors:

1). Out-Swing Doors: Non-removable pins. 2). Other Locations: Non-rising pins.

2. Tips: Flat button and matching plug. Finished to match leafs. a. Size: Where hinges are specified, unless otherwise noted, they

shall be of types and sizes as follows: 1). Interior Doors:

a). 1-3/4" thick - up to 3'-0" wide, 4-1/2" high b). 1-3/4" thick - over 3'-0" wide, 5" high

b. The width of hinges shall be sufficient to clear trim.

D. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 2. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. 3. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1

hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

E. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped

holes. 2. For wood doors install grommet nuts and bolts.


1233 page 08710-7

3. For fire-rated wood doors install grommet nuts and bolts installed by label machine shop.

4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. 2.3 PIVOTS

A. Offset Pivots: BHMA A156.4.

1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Rixson. a. Doors up 3’0” wide: Top Pivot 147 x 180 with ¾”offset.

Intermediate Pivot M19 with ¾” offset. b. Doors over 3’0” wide: H147 x H180 Top Pivot with ¾” offset.

Intermediate Pivot M19 with ¾” offset. 2. Provide one additional intermediate pivot for every additional 30 inches

for doors over 60 inches in height.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Sargent 8200 Series or comparable product by the following: 1. Schlage. 2. Corbin-Russwin.

B. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

C. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for

labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lock Trim: LNL.

F. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying

with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

G. Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to

operate. H. Certifications:

1. ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 2 Security. 2.5 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: FB M as manufactured by McKinney Hardware or comparable product by the following: 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.

B. Certifications: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, minimum 3/4 inch throw with 7/8 inch

adjustment.


page 08710-8 1233

2.6 KEYING AND KEY CONTROL

A. Characteristics: 1. The Contractor shall provide temporary construction cores in all locksets,

removable mullions and exit devices. a. Keys to be furnished by Owner.

2. Provide all locksets, removable mullions, exit devices and cylinders with housings and Sargent interchangeable cores. Master key all locksets and cylinders into existing Sargent Grand Master Key System. a. Exterior Doors: Sargent Signature series. b. Interior Doors: Sargent “C” conventional series.

3. Keying requirements to be coordinated and completed by the owner to protect the integrity of the system.

4. Contractor installs permanent cores and sets up key box with tagged keys and key schedule.

2.7 OPERATING TRIM

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: McKinney or comparable product by the following: 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2. trimco.

B. Push Plates:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: McKinney P053. 2. Characteristics:

a. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners.

b. Material to be stainless steel. c. Provide plate size as shown in hardware headings. d. Provide cutout for lock cylinders where required.

C. Door Pulls & Pull Plates:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: McKinney OP4514. 2. Characteristics:

a. Provide concealed thru-bolted trim on back to back mounted pulls, but not for single units.

b. Material to be forged stainless steel. c. Provide units sized as shown in hardware headings. d. Provide cutout for lock cylinders where required.

D. Push Pull Bars:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: McKinney PB812. 2. Characteristics:

a. Material to be forged stainless steel.

2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: 351 Series as manufactured by Sargent or comparable product by the following: 1. Corbin/Russwin.


1233 page 08710-9

2. LCN.

B. Characteristics: 1. Closers shall have non-ferrous covers, heavy duty forged steel arms, and

separate valves for adjusting backcheck, delayed action, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide sizes 1 through 6.

2. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

3. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified shall have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe ("CUSH").

4. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped. provide adjustable units complying with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening force.

5. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code.

6. Fastening: Finish on all exposed fasteners shall match devices. 2.9 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall Bumpers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: WS03 as manufactured by McKinney or

comparable product by the following: a. Rockwood b. Trimco

2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Door Stops: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: 590 Series as manufactured by Sargent or

comparable product by the following: a. Rixson Firemark. b. Glynn Johnson

2. Characteristics: a. Provide heavy duty door stops of stainless steel.

3. Fastening: Finish on all exposed fasteners shall match devices. 2.11 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Protective Plates: 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: McKinney or comparable product by the

following: a. Rockwood Manufacturing. b. Trimco.

2. Characteristics: a. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim

units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws. b. Materials:


page 08710-10 1233

1). Metal Plates: Stainless Steel, .050 inch. c. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than

door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side. Bevel and buff all edges.

3. Heights: a. Kick plates to be 8 inches in height. b. Mop plates to be 8 inches in height. c. Armor plates to be 34 inches in height. Armor plates on fire doors

to comply with NFPA 80. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE

A. Silencers: 1. Provide three for each single doors; two for pairs of doors.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method

indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,

generally prepared for machine screw installation. 1. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet

metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips

flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. All surface mounted hardware shall be attached with thru-bolts except closers at composite (FRP) doors.

2.14 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch of lock sets).

B. Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI or, if none established,

match the Architect’s sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s


1233 page 08710-11

standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

D. The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in

ANSI/BHMA A156.18, “Materials and Finishes,” including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. 1. Hinges (Interior wood doors): 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel. 2. Hinges (Exterior steel doors): 652 (US26D) Dull Chromium 3. Continuous Hinges: 628 (US28) Aluminum 4. Pivots: 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel 5. Locksets and Latchsets: 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel. 6. Cylinders: 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel. 7. Flush Bolts: 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel. 8. Exit Devices: 630 (US32D) 9. Removal Mullions: 600 (USP) 10. Door Closers: 689 (Powder Coated) 11. Magnetic Holders: 689 (US28) Satin Finish Aluminum. 12. Architectural Trim: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 13. Door Stops: 626 Satin Chrome Plated Brass/Bronze 14. Overhead Holders: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 15. Thresholds: 628 (US28) Satin Finish Aluminum 16. Weatherstrip: 628 (US28D) Satin Finish Aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except

as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect: A. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the

attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or poly-isobutylene

mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."


page 08710-12 1233

F. Weather-stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

3.3 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE

A. The contractor shall contact the hardware manufacturers' representative to schedule an inspection of the hardware installation to confirm that all products are installed and adjusted according to manufacturers’ recommendations. 1. Notify Owner 7 days prior to inspection. 2. AHC shall review the finished application and certify that all hardware

required by the Contract Documents has been installed and is functioning properly.

3. Five percent of total cost of hardware material and installation shall be withheld until receipt of AHC’s certification. This money is in addition to general retainage on Contract Sum.

B. Door Hardware Supplier's AHC Field Service

1. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.

2. File written report with Architect. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to

acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

3.5 SCHEDULE: See also Drawing Sheets for additional information END OF SECTION 08710

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Glazing March 6, 2019 SECTION 08801 – GLAZING & LAMINATED (HURRICANE) IMPACT RESISTANT GLASS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications and of the following types: 1. Products and applications specified in other sections where glazing

requirements are specified by reference to this Section: a. Steel doors. b. Glazed entrances. c. Storefront framing.

2. Security glazing types: a. Category II - Laminated [Monolithic] Glass Units.


1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for interior-glazing in the form of monolithic

and fire-rated glass. 3. Division 8 Section “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass and glazing units as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Laminated Glass Unit Surface Identification:

1. Surface No. 1: Exterior surface of outer lites 2. Inner-layer material

C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


A. General: Provide security glazing materials capable of complying with performance requirements indicated under the following conditions: 1. Exposure to solar radiation and design wind loads alone without failure

attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Glazing March 6, 2019

1233 page 08801-1

airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

2. Thicknesses of glazing materials specified are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glazing material thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glazing material for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths required to meet or exceed performance criteria.

B. Code Compliance:

1. Products specified herein shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the 2012 International Building Code –Hurricanes Prone Regions and Wind-Borne Debris Region requirements. a. When the requirements of the Code exceed those specified

herein, the Code requirements shall be furnished at no additional costs to the Owner.

b. When the requirements of this section exceed the Code requirements, the requirements of this section shall govern.

c. Submit evidence of compliance with Code requirements as required by local officials.

C. Structural Performance: Provide security glazing products capable of resisting

the kinds of lateral design loads indicated based on selecting glass thicknesses complying with ASTM E 1996. 1. Specified Design Wind Loads: As required by International Building Code. 2. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set

vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action with a load duration of 60 seconds or less.

3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glazing materials supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. a. For laminated-glass lites.

D. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide security glazing materials capable of

resisting impact from windborne debris based on the pass/fail criteria and testing information in ASTM E 1996 as determined from testing glazing materials in fenestration assemblies identical to those specified in Division 8 Section “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts” according to ASTM E 1886.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on security glazing framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products, in 12-inch square Samples for glass. 1. Each type of laminated glass with clear inner-layer.


page 08801-2 1233


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glazing installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glazing installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following from a single manufacturer for

each glass type: laminated glass and insulating glass.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.

D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in

16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass

with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glazing product manufacturers and organization below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. a. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass

Design Guide." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as

needed to prevent damage to glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.


A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,

products by the following are acceptable: Guardian Industries Corporation or compatible products by the following: 1. PPG Industries.


1233 page 08801-3

2. Saint Gorbian Glass Exprover, NA

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality q3; class as indicated in other Part 2 articles.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass);

Quality q3; class, kind, and condition as indicated in other Part 2 articles. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave

distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, (9/16” thick) and complying with other

requirements specified and with the following:. 1. Interlayers: Type as indicated below and of thickness indicated or

required to comply with performance requirements and with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating to glass and installation:

2. Fabrication: Laminate glass to interlayers to produce monolithic laminated lites free of foreign substances, air, and glass pockets.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following

requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one

another and with other materials they will contact, including glazing lites, seals of insulating-glass and air-gap glazing units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glazing unit manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other

requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

C. Neutral- Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant:

1. Products: a. As recommended by glass manufacturer for specified installation.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass.


page 08801-4 1233

2.4 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glazing unit manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to

continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to

continuous pressure.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard and requirements of manufacturers of glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket

manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer

hardness required by glazing unit manufacturer to maintain glazing units in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit lateral movement

(side walking) of glazing units. 1. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell

material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. General: Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for

Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.7 LAMINATED-GLASS UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Sun-Guard Laminated Glass.

B. Laminated-Glass Units (monolithic)

1. Overall Unit Thickness: As determined by thicknesses of lites and inner-layer.

2. Outboard Lites: Annealed clear- float glass. a. Fully tempered [clear] float glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1,

Quality q3.


1233 page 08801-5

b. Glass Thickness: 3/16 inch (each layer) c. Heat Treatment: Tempered; ASTM C 1048, Kind FT; CPSC 16CFR-

1201; ANSI Z 97.1. 3. Inner-layer: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB) plastic interlayer, clear, 0.090 inch

thick. 4. Glass Unit Performance Characteristics:

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 67 percent. b. Visible Light Reflectance Outdoors: 11 percent. c. Winter U-Value Nighttime: .95. d. Summer U-Value Daytime: .87. e. Shading Coefficient: .46. f. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .40. g. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Per International Building Code.

5. Edge Seals: ASTM E 773, with aluminum spacers and silicone sealant for

glass-to-spacer seals. 6. Windborne-Debris Resistance: As required by International Building Code.


A. Examine framing for glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size,

squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glazing-unit-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been


A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glazing units

immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glazing lites, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings or determined by glazing

material thicknesses and by other requirements indicated, provide necessary bite on lites, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glazing-lite edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove

damaged glazing lites from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glazing lites are those with edge damage or other imperfections that,


page 08801-6 1233

when installed, could weaken glazing lites and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as

determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glazing unit manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glazing unit manufacturers for

installing lites.

G. Provide spacers for glazing lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside

faces of glazing lites. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glazing lites and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glazing lites from

moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glazing unit manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar

characteristics.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glazing units, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not

stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover joints by applying tapes to jambs first and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted

together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is

installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where indicated.


1233 page 08801-7

G. Center glazing units in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glazing units from damage immediately after installation by

attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glazing unit. Do not apply markers to glazing unit surfaces. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glazing units from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glazing units, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glazing unit manufacturer.

C. Examine glazing unit surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other

masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glazing unit manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glazing units that are broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded

or that are damaged from natural causes, accidents, or vandalism during construction period.

E. Wash glazing units on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more

than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Final Completion. Wash glazing units as recommended by glazing unit manufacturer.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Interior Aluminum Storefront & Entrances: 9/16” laminated glass (monolithic) B. Exterior Hollow Metal Frames: ............... 1-5/16” insulated glass with

laminated inboard lite C. Exterior Aluminum Storefront & Entrances: 1-5/16” insulated glass with

laminated inboard lite.

D. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors: .................. 9/16” laminated glass (monolithic) END OF SECTION 08801

SECTION 09250 – GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. (Note: Refer to Acoustical Sound Batt

Insulation Section) 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for

gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from

UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand

name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against

damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum

board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Gypsum Board March 6, 2019

1233 page 09250-1


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. National Gypsum Company. d. Unimast, Inc.

2. Gypsum Products: a. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Georgia Pacific Gypsum

Corporation or comparable product by the following: 1). Lafarge North America. 2). National Gypsum Company. 3). United States Gypsum Company.

2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire. C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system

composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System. c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows:

1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for

metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch at interior, 0.0312 inch at

exterior, unless noted otherwise. 2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Deflection Tracks: Slotted track with minimum 2 inch high leg or double

track installation with minimum 2 inch high leg runners.

C. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.


page 09250-2 1233

2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize

joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. C. Types:

1. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 1 for indention, Level 3 for surface abrasion, hard and soft body impact resistance a. Core: 5/8 inch thick, Type X. b. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation

that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged

surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,

fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim

accessories. 4. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 6. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable

topping compound.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


1233 page 09250-3

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly

adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.


A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Ceilings: Where applicable, Coordinate installation of ceiling

suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for

installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading

imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building

structure. C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other

objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.


page 09250-4 1233

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural

members. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings

so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but

not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

D. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid

suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-

gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Provide deflection track system at top of all framed partitions extending

to structural framing.

B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above

suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not

fasten studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track.


1233 page 09250-5

2. For fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:

1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end

of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting

end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact

at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where

intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is

attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum

panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed

spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,

or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and

other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs


page 09250-6 1233

and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board

application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

3. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

4. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill

screws. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific

locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges

not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:


1233 page 09250-7

1. Level 2-Unexposed Location: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.

2. Level 4-Exposed Locations, Unless noted otherwise: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and few of tool marks and ridges.

3. Level 5-Exposed Location, Subject to down lightening or all curved surfaces: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat of joint compound or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or

part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive

gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for

operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water

piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of ceiling support framing. e. Removal of all temporary wiring, trash and debris.

3.11 SCHEDULE A. Exposed Locations:

1. Classrooms: Paperless wallboard impact resistant wallboard to 8 feet above finish floor. Fire rated wallboard above and as noted on the Drawings

2. Corridors: Paperless wallboard impact resistant wallboard to 8 feet above finish floor. Regular or fire rated wallboard above and as noted on the Drawings.

3. Other Locations: Regular or fire rated wallboard and as noted on the Drawings


page 09250-8 1233

B. Concealed Locations: Regular or fire rated wallboard as required by partition type. END OF SECTION 09250

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules March 6, 2019 SECTION 09512 – ACOUSTICAL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Acoustical Ceiling Panels B. Custom Fabricated Acoustic Wall Panels

1. REFERENCES

a. ASTM International (Acoustic wall panels):

1). ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

2). ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3). ASTM E795 Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

B. LR: Light Reflectance Coefficient.

C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

a. Performance Requirements (Acoustic wall panels)

1). Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): a). Flamespread: 25 maximum.

b). Smoke Developed: 250 maximum


A. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.


1233 page 09512-1

1.5 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Attic Stock: Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to one box or 2.0

percent, which ever is greater of quantity installed; one sheet of each color provided for the acoustic wall panels. a. These extra materials shall not be opened or used by the

Contractor. Place a label, protected by clear plastic, on each package with the following typewritten information. 1). Manufacturer. 2). Product name and number. 3). Installation contractor. 4). Date that the stock is put in the Owner’s inventory. 5). Room or area number where the product was used.

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.


A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type

through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. Provide seismic restraint as required by 2006 International Building Code

with Georgia Amendments. Refer to structural drawing for seismic design category. Component importance factor shall be equal to 1.0.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperatures

1. Maintain substrate surface and ambient temperatures above 55 degrees F, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Do not apply adhesive when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature

is below 55 degrees F.

3. Maintain these conditions 72 hours before, during, and after installation of vinyl wallcovering.

B. Lighting: Provide not less than 80 foot candles per square foot minimum, measured mid-

height on the surfaces to receive wallcoverings. C. Wall Condition

1. The wall surface should be clean, dry, structurally sound, and free of mildew, grease, dust, or other stains.

2. Remove any existing wallcovering and adhesive.


page 09512-2 1233

3. Plaster and masonry wall surfaces should not exceed 5.5% moisture when meas-

ured by a BD-8 Delmhorst moisture meter. Gypsum board wall surfaces should not exceed 16% moisture.

4. Room humidity should not exceed 90%.

5. Wall surfaces should be primed with a quality wallcovering primer as approved by

manufacturer. Wall surfaces with significant color variation should be primed with a good quality pigmented wallcovering primer.

6. New plaster should age 60-90 days before painting or installing wallcovering.


C. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

D. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and

a stabilized moisture content.

E. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

F. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panels until spaces are

enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Where present, operate ventilation system for not

less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of acoustical panel ceilings that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failure shall include, but it not limited to, the following:

a. Grid support failure. b. Sagging tiles.

2. Warranty Period:


1233 page 09512-3

a. 10 years from Date of Final Completion. b. Other Products: 5 years from Date of Final Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall promptly replace any tiles damaged by water and/or roof leaks for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. Contractor shall further replace any tile damaged by roof leaks for a period of two years from the date of substantial completion.

B. Replacement Tiles:

1. Contractor shall furnish tile from same production run as original ceiling. 2. If original tile is no longer available, tile shall match existing. 3. If matching tile are unavailable, contractor shall replace tile in entire

room at no additional cost to Owner. 4. Owner’s attic stock shall not be used for replacement tiles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in

which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics

indicated for each product type. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING – APC1

A. Basic-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, No. 1728 Fine Fissured acoustical ceiling panel as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable product by the following: 1. Celotex. 2. United States Gypsum.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and

pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, Mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water

felted; humidity resistant (humigard) or equivalent. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.85.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.

F. CAC: Not less than 33.


page 09512-4 1233

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.2B Acoustic wall panels; approved manufacturers…Zintra, Filzfelt (wool), CSI Wall Panels (Soundcore Freeform), OFFECCT Soundwave Acoustic

1. Constructed using Polyester Fiber

2. Thickness: 12mm (0.47”)

3. Size: As indicated on the drawings up to a maximum 48 inch (1219 mm) x 108 inch (2743mm) panel.

4. Edge Detail: [Square]

5. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient as follows:

a. 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) Panel: 0.45, minimum.

6. Mounting Accessories: Mount on existing glass window…Neutral Cure Silicone Adhesive

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard direct hung metal suspension system of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Color, General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finushes Manual for

Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer’s standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for “Coating

Classification for Severe Environment Performance” where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C6385,

Table 1, “Direct Hung,” unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide complying with the following

requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel: ASTM A641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.


1233 page 09512-5

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yeild stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch diameter wire.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING - APC 1:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: United States Gypsum No. DX Suspension System or comparable product by the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 2. BPB USA; 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web,Steel Suspension System: Main and cross

runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDING AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 2. BPB USA; 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or,

if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel

edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


page 09512-6 1233

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. NOTICE: NO CEILING WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED UNTIL ALL REVIEWS BY THE

COUNTY INSPECTORS, THE FIRE MARSHALS, THE ENGINEERS, THE ARCHITECT AND THE OWNER HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. ALL TEMPORARY WIRING AND OTHER MATERIALS NOT PART OF THE PERMANENT INSTALLATION SHALL BE REMOVED PRIOR TO COVER-UP.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Acoustical Panel Ceilings: 1. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and

seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

2. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: a. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or

other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

b. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to

supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

b. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support

ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.


1233 page 09512-7

1). Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

b. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

6. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 7. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely

interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

8. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

9. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to

short axis of space. b. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden

from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.

B. Acoustical Wall Panels: 1. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and

seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Resilient Flooring March 6, 2019

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 65 00 - 1

SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Requirements and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base (VB). 2. Resilient molding accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Resilient base and accessories:

a. For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for static-control resilient flooring.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.



09 65 00 - 2

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish two boxes of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).

1. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Material Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation and for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

D. Install floor tile and resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



09 65 00 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Mannington. 4. Roppe.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Design Professional from full range of industry colors.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Mannington. 4. Roppe.

B. Description: Rubber nosing for resilient flooring, reducer strip for resilient flooring, and transition strips.

C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Design Professional from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Resilient base and accessories:



09 65 00 - 4

1. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.



09 65 00 - 5

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Luxury vinyl floor tile, vinyl composition floor tile and resilient products:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. 2. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

a. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. b. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. c. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.



09 65 00 - 6

3. Protect floor tile and resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

B. Cover floor tile until Material Completion.

C. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Material Completion.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Interior Painting March 6, 2019

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Clay masonry. 2. Steel and iron. 3. Galvanized. 4. Wood. 5. Plastic. 6. Gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements:

1. None

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. (Brick, gypsum board and conduits)

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. (Wood trim)

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) at existing brick surfaces only.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Material Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sherwin-Williams

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by the Architect a. Walls: SW b. Trim: SW

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:



1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.



C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

I. Plastic: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.



5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Wall mounted power source devices

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Other items as directed by Architect. h. Wall mounted power source devices

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply



additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Clay Masonry Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 4.1M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107.


c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145 for exposed metal conduits.

C. Wood Substrates: Wood trim, Architectural woodwork, Doors

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 6.3V:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.




c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 5) MPI #54 for hollow metal doors, frames and any exposed metal trim as directed by the Architect/

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.3N:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.



E. Plastic Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 6.8F:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69.



F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.




PART 1 - SECTION 10265 – WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push

plates.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations

and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection

unit indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color

selection.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single

source from single manufacturer. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall

protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Wall & Door Protection March 6, 2019

1233 page10265-1


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F

during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or

until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F . 4. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 5. Store covers in a horizontal position.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.


A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material, thickness as indicated. 1. Impact Resistance: Passes when tested according to ASTM F 476. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 1308. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type

of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T6.

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal

screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

2.2 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Construction Specialties, Inc.; SM-20AE or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. b. Pawling Corporation.


page 10265-2 1233

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; [as follows: a. Profile: Nominal 3-inch- long leg and 1/4-inch corner radius. b. Height: 4 feet a.f.f. c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range. 3. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips. 5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color

matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover. 6. Mounting: Oval head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled

mounting holes.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field

assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled.

Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.


A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for

blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.


1233 page10265-3

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories

required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice

aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches.

c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing

by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10265

SECTION 10430 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plaques. 2. Stencling


1. Division 16 "Electrical" for power and data to exterior marquee and labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical

members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of

wording, lettering, artwork, and braille layout.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range

of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Plaque Casting: 6 inches square including border. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional

character (letter, number, and graphic element). 3. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square including border.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Signage March 6, 2019

1233 page 10430-1

A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a

single manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 CAST-METAL PLAQUES

A. General: Provide castings free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and in required thickness, size, shape, and copy.

B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, A. R. K.

Ramos Architectural Signage System or comparable product by the following: 1. Gemini Inc. 2. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg.

2.3 PANEL SIGNS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, HC300 series as manufactured by Best Sign Systems or comparable product by the following: 1. American Graphics, Inc. 2. Andco Industries. 3. ASI Sign Systems Inc.


page 10430-2 1233

4. Henry Graphics. 5. Mohawk Sign Systems. 6. Multi-Graphics, Inc.

B. General: Interior Panel Signs: Where indicated on the Drawings…provide & install

smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. Plastic Laminate: Tactile characters/symbols shall be raised 1/32 inch

from sign plate face. Signs shall be of one-piece construction; added-on and/or engraved characters are unacceptable. a. Plaque material shall consist of melamine plastic laminate,

approximately 1/8-inch thick (1/4-inch thick for slot signs), with background painted a contrasting color and rated non-static, fire-retardant and self-extinguishing. Plastic laminate will be impervious to most acids, alkalies, alcohol, solvents, abrasives and boiling water.

2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2-inch radius. 4. Border: 3/8-inch wide, 1/32-inch raised perimeter border with 1/8-inch

inside radius typical. 5. Mounting: Unframed. 6. All letters, numbers and/or symbols shall contrast with their background

– either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Characters and background shall have matte finish.

7. Lettering style shall be Standard Medium, upper case, or other sans serif or simple serif typeface.

8. Sizes of letters and numbers shall be as follows: a. Room numbers shall be 5/8-inch high. b. Lettering for room usage and directional identification shall be

5/8-inch high. c. Lettering for pictogram sign identification shall be 5/8-inch high,

corresponding symbols shall be 3 inch high. 9. Letters and numbers shall be centered on sign. 10. Grade 2 braille shall be placed directly below last line of letters or

numbers, except for room number signs, where they shall be placed directly behind the last number.

C. Tactile and Braille Copy: Comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 1. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.

D. Panel Sign Types:

1. General: Provide signs adjacent to all doors and openings. 2. Sign Type “A”: 6 inch x 6 inch plastic molded sign and fixed raised

lettering and Grade II braille to meet ADA requirements. a. Non-Classrooms or Toilets rooms shall have room number and

name at all entrances that reflects its usage: PRINCIPAL, SECRETARY, HEALTH, GUIDANCE, COUNCILOR, ART, MUSIC, BAND, SCIENCE, CUSTODIAL, SPEECH LAB, RESOURCE ROOM, READING LAB, TEXT BOOK STORAGE, etc.


1233 page 10430-3

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and

inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of

Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free

from distortion and other defects in appearance.


page 10430-4 1233

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed

through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

2. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.

3.3 STENCILING

A. Stenciling of Fire- and Smoke- Rated Assemblies: Contractor shall permanently stencil portions of all rated assemblies located above finish ceilings and/or in concealed spaces with letters a minimum of 2 inches high on a contrasting background spaced a maximum of 12 feet on centers with a minimum of one per rated wall or barrier. The hourly rating shall be included on all rated barriers or walls. Wording shall be “XX Hour Fire Barrier – Protect all Openings” at rated assemblies; “XX Hour Fire and Smoke Barrier – Protect all Openings” at fire and smoke rated assemblies; and “Smoke Partition – Protect all Openings” at non-fire-rated smoke rated assemblies.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.


SECTION 12355 - CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design. 2. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinetry of custom design. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 6 - Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring manufactured wood casework.

2. Division 9 - Section "Gypsum Board" for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring manufactured wood casework.

3. Division 9 - Section "Resilient Flooring" for resilient base applied to manufactured wood casework.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are

closed, including bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches above floor, and surfaces visible in open cabinets.

B. Semi-exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors of cabinets, shelves, dividers, interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of doors. Tops of cases 78 inches or more above floor are defined as semi-exposed.

C. Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and ends and backs that are placed directly against walls or other cabinets.

D. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with adhesive, and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to

other work. Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware.

SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Casework March 6, 2019

1233 page 12355-1

Show installation details, including field joints and filler panels. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: 8-by-10-inch Samples for each type of finish, including top material.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and finish of manufactured wood

casework provided. Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged casework finish.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained

and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain manufactured wood casework from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" for Premium grade. 1. Provide WI-certified compliance certificate indicating that manufactured

wood casework complies with requirements of grades specified.

D. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of manufactured wood casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered if listed herein or by addenda.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured wood casework only after painting, utility roughing-in, and

similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install manufactured wood

casework until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is


page 12355-2 1233

complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with manufactured wood casework by field measurements before fabrication.

1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements in walls and

partitions for support of manufactured wood casework.

1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. b. Warping of components. c. Failure of operating hardware. d. Deterioration of finishes.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Advantage

3100 Series as manufactured by Stephens Industries or equivalent products by the following: 1. Case Systems, Inc. 2. Fisher Hamilton L.L.C. 3. LSI Corporation of America, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent

for softwood.

B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, veneer core unless otherwise indicated.

C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. E. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following: 1. Formica Corporation. 2. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. 3. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.


1233 page 12355-3

G. Edge-banding for Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate matching adjacent surfaces.

2.3 CABINET MATERIALS A. Exposed Cabinet Materials:

1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edge-banding on all

exposed edges.

B. Semi-exposed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS. 2. Provide plastic laminate for semi-exposed surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edge-banding on all semi-

exposed edges.

C. Concealed Cabinet Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: Grade BKL.

2.4 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH A. Design: Provide manufactured wood casework of the following design:

1. Flush overlay doors (some on existing casework) with wire pulls and lockable hardware; typical all locations

B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from

plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range.

2.5 CABINET FABRICATION A. New - Plastic-Laminate-Faced Cabinet Construction: As required by referenced

quality standard, but not less than the following: 1. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets and Tall

Cabinets: 3/4-inch plycore, plastic-laminate faced. 2. Shelves: 3/4-inch plywood, plastic-laminate faced. 3. Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch plycore, plastic-laminate faced. 4. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch plycore, plastic-laminate faced. 5. Drawer Sides and Backs: 3/4-inch solid-wood or veneer-core hardwood

plywood or plycore, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints. 6. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch MDF glued and dadoed into front, back, and

sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch material for drawers more than 24 inches wide.

7. Doors: 3/4-inch plycore, plastic-laminate faced. 8. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and

walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets.

2.6 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard

satin-finish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.


page 12355-4 1233

B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semi-concealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 hinges for doors less than 48 inches high and 3 hinges for doors more than 48 inches high.

C. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, provide recessed stainless-steel flush pulls. Provide 2 pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.

D. Door Catches: Powder-coated, dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catch. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches high.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-

extension type; zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides. 2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200, for drawers more than 6 inches high

or 24 inches wide. 3. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for computer keyboard shelves. 4. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: [Cylindrical (cam)] [Mortise] type, 5-pin

tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish, and complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1. a. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and six master keys. b. Provide locks where indicated.

F. Sliding-Door Hardware Sets: Manufacturer's standard, to suit type and size of

sliding-door units.

G. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Single-pin metal shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B04013.

H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

2.7 COUNTERTOPS A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform

plane free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.

B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded to both sides of 1-1/8-inch plywood or particleboard. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded. 1. Plastic Laminate for Flat Tops: [Grade HGS] [Grade HGL] Grade HGS. 2. Plastic Laminate for Backing: Grade BKL. 3. Provide plastic-laminate edgings of the same material as top on front

edge of top, on top edges of backsplashes and end splashes, and on ends of tops and splashes.

4. Use exterior plywood or exterior glue particleboard for countertops containing sinks. Use exterior marine plywood for countertops containing sinks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


1233 page 12355-5

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of manufactured wood casework.


3.2 CASEWORK INSTALLATION and / or RE-INSTALLATION A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where

manufactured wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical .

B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. 1. Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor

at toe space with fasteners spaced [16 inches (400 mm)] [24 inches (600 mm)] o.c. Secure sides of cabinets to floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than two fasteners.

C. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises

unless otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.

D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF TOPS A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using

dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed

clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back.

C. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.

D. Secure backsplashes and to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches and walls with adhesive.


page 12355-6 1233

E. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant

or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of

installation.

B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Basic Electrical March 6, 2019

1233 Page 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DEFINITIONS

A. Drawings, specifications and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other Sections of Division 16.

B. “Drawings” or “Contract Drawings”, as used herein, refer to the project

contract drawings. C. “Specifications” or “Contract Specifications”, as used herein, refer to the

project contract specifications. D. “Documents” or “Contract Documents”, as used herein, refer to the project

contract drawings, specifications, and general conditions and requirements. E. “Division 16”, as used herein, refers to the project Division of Work and Scope

(also referred to as the Electrical Division), comprising the project requirements intended for the Electrical Contractor’s completion. Included are all Electrical Division Drawings and Electrical Division Specifications (16000).

F. “Contractor”, as used herein, refers to the General Contractor (including his

sub-contractors and his electrical contractor(s) / etc., equipment manufacturers, and suppliers who provide his equipment), who has responsibility to furnish and install the “Scope of Work”, as described herein and per the Contract Documents.

G. “Owner”, as used herein, refers to the property owner, proprietor,

administrator or agent as defined in the project contractual agreements. H. “Code”, as used herein, refers to all of the applicable regulatory and advisory

standards listed herein. I. The requirements of this Section apply to the entire Scope of Work including

that shown on the Drawings, in the Division 16 Section Specifications, in the General and Supplementary Conditions, and in the Division 1 Specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general, administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following general, administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified elsewhere in general project specifications and in Division 1:

1. Scope of work.


Page 16010 - 2 1233

2. Applicable standards / Quality assurance. 3. Interpretation of Drawings. 4. Priority of contract documents. 5. Submittals. 6. Co-ordination drawings. 7. Record documents. 8. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 9. Materials. 10. Codes, inspections and fees. 11. Delivery, storage and handling. 12. Tests and settings. 13. Manufacturers’ services. 14. Size of equipment. 15. Enclosure types. 16. Hazardous areas. 17. Electrical protective device coordination, short circuit and other

studies. 18. Warranty.

B. Related Sections:

1. All Division 16 Section Specifications.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, supervision, materials, equipment and incidentals required to make ready for use complete functional electrical systems as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. The work shall include furnishing, installing, interconnecting and testing the

equipment and materials specified in all other Sections of the Division 16 Specifications and shown on the Drawings.


1233 Page 16010 - 3

C. The work shall include furnishing, coordinating, and installing the following:

1. It is intended that Contractor coordinate with the Electrical Utility Company, to the extent necessary, so that an appropriate, complete and reliable electrical service is provided for this project. Contractor shall include in his project scope and pricing and bear responsibility for coordination and completion of all requisite work as required by Utility including the following:

a) Project service transformer pad, vault, and / or work to enable

/ facilitate Utility interface or “point-of-tie-in” interface. b) Determination and implementation of Utility requirements and

details and locations of service transformer. c) Conduit and 15 kv nominal wire / cable between project service

transformer and Utility primary voltage point-of tie-in, as per Utility. Cable per utility specifications / requirements and as specified.

d) Utility requirements for metering and installation. e) Complete conduit and wiring and termination of secondary

voltage conductors between the project service transformer and the project service entrance equipment.

f) Concrete encasement of primary raceways. g) Concrete encasement of project service transformer secondary

raceways, where required and /or called for on the Contract Drawings.

h) Utility required fencing, bollards, grounding, signage and all miscellaneous appurtenances.

Contractor shall include all costs for items tabulated above and

appurtenant items related to Electric Utility Company service or supply, in his scope, cost estimates, bids, etc. Intent is that these costs, to the extent applicable, be passed from Utility, through Contractor (as project costs), to Owner as part of the electrical subcontract bid price and subsequent payment requests.

2. Unless indicated otherwise, complete, functional, fully installed,

interconnected and tested systems for electrical power, lighting, related control, grounding, telephone, data, fire alarm, electrical heat tracing of piping, etc. as indicated in other Sections of Division 16 and as shown on the Drawings are included in Division 16 scope. Excepted are wiring for telephone and data, where only an empty conduit system with pull wire is indicated or specified.

3. Unless indicated otherwise, conduit, wire, field connections and

installation for all motors, motor controllers, control devices, control panels, and “packaged” equipment furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications are included in Division 16 scope.

4. Unless indicated otherwise, installation, mounting and field wiring for

all field-mounted devices and instruments, furnished under other


Page 16010 - 4 1233

Divisions and / or Sections of these Specifications, which require on-site electrical and / or electronic wiring supply / terminations, are included. All conduit, wire, and interconnections between devices, primary elements, transducers, transmitters, relays, transformers, indicators, sensors, switches, alarms, control panels, etc. are similarly included in Division 16.

5. To the extent indicated, a complete raceway system for all special and

/ or system cables furnished by electronic system suppliers, specialty suppliers and similar system suppliers is included. Review the raceway layout with Supplier and the cable manufacturer, prior to installation, to insure raceway compatibility with the systems and materials being furnished.

6. Unless indicated otherwise, installation of all control panels,

controllers, etc. furnished under other Divisions and / or Sections of these Specifications.

7. Nominal 110-120 volt or greater power service, power supply, power

wiring and appropriate conduit or raceway for all equipment and devices utilizing or requiring such power including power for heating, ventilating, air conditioning, (HVAC), mechanical and/or plumbing equipment and appurtenances furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications is included. Include power wiring and conduit for all air handlers, fans, condensing units, heat pumps, heaters, heat tracing, unit heaters, pumps, powered induction units (PIUs), terminal units, fan coil units, variable air volume units (VAVs), dampers, louvers, motorized operators, valves and any and all other similar HVAC, mechanical and/or plumbing equipment. Include power wiring for all such equipment covered by the Division 15 Drawings and /or Specifications. Provide power wiring and conduit from power source to equipment physical locations and provide wiring terminations as required, including conduit for thermostat wiring in the walls.

Unless noted otherwise, excluded from Division 16 responsibility are conduit and wiring for Division 15 furnished “HVAC Controls”, “Building Automation Systems (BAS)”, Building Management Systems (BMS)”, “Sequence of Operations Systems” and other similar HVAC related controls, sensing, indicating, data acquisition, monitoring, trending, energy conserving systems / devices that require / operate at only “low” voltage ( below 110-120 volt nominal) and that do not require 110 -120 volt or greater power supply connections. Electrical Contractor’s scope is limited to providing conduit and power wiring only to these systems / devices that require 110-120 volt or greater power connections. See applicable Sections of Division 15 or for reference.

8. A complete conduit or raceway system with nominal 110-120 volt or

greater power wiring for all electronic/ technology and similar system devices and units requiring such supply power from the building infrastructure. Such electronic/ technology systems will be furnished under separate Divisions of the Specifications, unless noted otherwise.


1233 Page 16010 - 5

Included in Div.16 scope are conduit and power wiring for intercoms, paging, PAs, stage lighting system, specialty lighting, scoreboards, clocks, bells, CCTV, CATV, security, cameras, IT, telephone and data, and similar systems. Coordinate requirements with the electronic/ technology system(s) Supplier(s).

9. A complete empty raceway system with pull wire for low voltage (12V,

24V, 48V, etc.) control, signaling, data highways, etc. related to all electronic / technology and similar Systems and devices shall be furnished and installed by Div.16. The supply, installation and termination of such systems, devices, cables, and their required wiring shall be under separate Divisions of these Specifications, unless noted otherwise. (Note that Div 16 scope related to HVAC related control systems is excepted, and shall be as specified per above applicable paragraphs). Base the raceway layout on the approved shop drawings of each System Supplier and coordinate with him, prior to installation, to insure raceway compatibility with the systems and materials being furnished.

10. Unless indicated otherwise such as in paragraphs 7, 8, and 9 above,

Contractor shall review the shop drawings of all electrically operated equipment and all equipment with electrical connections furnished under all divisions of these specifications. Contractor shall wire and interconnect all materials, devices, components, systems and packages requiring “field wiring”. Where applicable, Contractor shall make electrical interconnections per manufacturer s requirements. This includes, but is not limited to, devices that are parts of “packages” but which are shipped separately and require field connection. Also, Contractor shall identify terminals and prepare drawings or wiring tables to extent necessary to enable interconnections.

11. Electrical power utility, conduit, wiring, and wiring termination for all

special equipment furnished under other Divisions. Included in Div. 16 are electrical supply to kitchen appliances, laundry appliances, architectural appurtenances, dewatering, rain harvesting, energy harvesting / reducing systems, pumps, site utilities, grounds maintenance equipment, and similar equipment.

12. Demolition, where / as required.

D. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and all work which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section or other applicable sections shall be furnished at no extra cost.

E. Where applicable, the Contractor or his authorized representatives shall,

before preparing his proposal, visit all areas of the existing site, buildings and structures in which work under this section is to be performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this Contractor shall be considered evidence that he or his representative has


Page 16010 - 6 1233

visited the buildings and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed and that he takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his work.

F. Where applicable, all power interruptions to existing equipment shall be at the

Owner’s convenience with 72 hours (minimum) notice. Each interruption shall have prior approval.

G. Where applicable, the Contractor shall maintain the existing facility in

operation at all times. H. Temporary power connections as required shall be provided by the Contractor

at no additional expense to the Owner. All temporary wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer details, methods, materials, etc. prior to making temporary connections. Furnish and install all equipment and materials including control equipment, motor starters, branch and feeder circuit breakers, panelboards, transformers, etc., for temporary power. Remove temporary installations prior to / at job completion.

I. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the

completion of work and making any minor correction changes or adjustments necessary for the proper functioning of the system and equipment. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality; substandard work will be rejected.

J. Where applicable, identify and verify field conditions of all existing

underground structures and utilities, including electrical and mechanical piping.

K. The Contractor shall have the Manufacturer of the major electrical components

(per Paragraph 2.01) provide a coordination and short circuit study as specified herein. Contractor shall set all protective devices and relays as specified in Paragraph 1.19.

L. Where applicable, provide all electrical work associated with the relocation of

equipment for the existing and new facilities, including disconnection of all existing wiring and conduits and provision of new wiring from the point of electrical supply and conduit to the relocated equipment.

M. Excavation and backfilling, including gravel or sand bedding for underground

electrical work is included in Division 16. N. Concrete work, including concrete electrical duct encasement and electrical

equipment and light pole foundations and pads, is included in Division 16. O. Contractor shall provide all work for duct banks, including but no limited to

excavation, concrete, conduit, reinforcement, backfilling, grading and seeding. All work shall be in accordance with Divisions 2 and 3 of these specifications.


1233 Page 16010 - 7

P. Complete coordination with other contractors. Div. 16 Contractor shall coordinate with other contractors regarding each-others equipment and equipment submittals and shall obtain all relevant submittals.

Q. Complete electrical heat tracing system for all piping which is indicated as

electrically traced on the project Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams and/or project Mechanical Drawings / Specifications. Contractor shall employ the services of an approved heat-tracing product manufacturer to design the system, using a certified manufacturer developed electronic based program. System shall protect piping and appurtenances against freezing, or shall maintain temperatures, as required. System shall include code-compliant, environmentally suitable and properly sized self-regulating heat tracing cables, and all related requisite power source and control equipment, panels, transformers, circuitry, contactors, controls, etc. necessary for a complete and functional heat tracing system. Installation shall be by Contractor.

R. Complete coordination with the Electrical Utility Company. Contractor shall

complete applicable Utility forms and comply with and respond to Utility requests for information. Such are as related to, but not limited to, sizes and types of new electrical loads, existing loads to remain, existing loads to be deleted, anticipated load diversity/ demand, generators, and size, rating and characteristics of Owner’s new and existing electrical equipment, etc., to the extent required by the Utility Company. Intent is that Utility Company will, from such coordination with Contractor, be able to finalize Utility’s incoming electrical service ratings and details, service transformer(s) ratings and details, and proper interconnection with Owner’s equipment.

S. Seismic Requirements:

1. Conform to the requirements indicated on the structural and other

Contract Documents, where applicable.

2. It shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturers and suppliers along with the Contractor to conform to the seismic design requirements based on the project’s seismic classification and/or the Contract Documents.

3. All electrical raceways and equipment shall utilize earthquake resistant

supporting systems as required by the project’s seismic classification and/or the Contract Documents.

4. Electrical distribution and power control equipment shall be labeled by

the equipment manufacturer as “seismic qualified”. This labeling shall be indicative that representative samples of the same equipment have been tested and found to meet or exceed the seismic requirements of the I.B.C., U.B.C. and C.B.C. codes for the applicable project seismic classification. Contractor shall install such equipment in accordance with these codes and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Equipment seismic labeling applies to panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, busway, transfer switches, switchgear, network protectors,


Page 16010 - 8 1233

transformers, power centers, metal enclosed switchgear, metal clad switchgear, loadcenters, safety switches and enclosed control assemblies.

T. Interface with the services provided by the Telephone, Data and other Systems

Utility Companies / Service Providers. Unless indicated otherwise, furnish and install 4 foot x 8 foot x ¾ inch painted plywood backboard at designated location within the site and two- 4 inch underground non-metallic conduits with pull-wire between the backboard and each point of interface as directed by the applicable Telephone or other Systems’ Utilities.

U. Complete testing, as specified.

1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS / QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All electric equipment, materials, and installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and with the latest edition adopted by the authorities having jurisdiction of all codes and standards of the following organizations:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), including (but not limited to):

a. National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70 b. National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72 c. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 d. Emergency and Standby Power Systems, NFPA 110

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), including (but not limited to):

a. National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2

3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 4 Federal Communication Commission (FCC) 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 8. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 9. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)


1233 Page 16010 - 9

10. Illumination Engineering Society (IES) 11. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 12. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) 13. International Building Code (IBC) published by the International Code

Council (ICC).

14. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 15. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) 16. International Energy Conservation Code 17. National Electrical Contractors Association Installation Standards

(NECA) 18. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 19. Savannah Chatham County Public School System (SCCPSS) Construction

Design Guidelines 20. All applicable state and local codes, amendments, regulations and

practices, including:

a. Georgia Amendments to International Building, Fire, Plumbing, Mechanical, Fuel Gas and Energy Conservation Codes, all editions.

b. Georgia Amendments to the National Electrical Code, all

editions. c. Document 120-3-3, State Minimum Fire Safety Standards as

issued by the Georgia State Fire Marshal Office, effective 03-09-2010.

21. All applicable regulatory requirements and advisory practices of

appropriate Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs). 22. All applicable standards, regulations and practices of the Owner.

B. Where codes and/or standards conflict, the most conservative document shall be followed.

C. Per OSHA, all electrical equipment and materials shall be listed by

Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL), or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), and shall bear the appropriate UL or NRTL listing mark or classification marking. Equipment, materials, etc. utilized not bearing a UL or


Page 16010 - 10 1233

NRTL certification shall be field certified by UL or NRTL prior to equipment acceptance and use.

D. The portion of work requiring interface with any and all utility companies,

service providers, etc. shall be in accordance with their codes, regulations, requirements, etc.

E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect

at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.5 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. Electrical loads (KVA, KW, Horsepower, Amperes, etc.) and wiring requirements indicated on the electrical Drawings are estimates representative of standard mechanical and building equipment. Electrical equipment ratings, bus ratings, circuit wire sizes, circuit wire quantities, conduit sizes, conduit quantities and overcurrent protection device ratings indicated on the Drawings are based on such equipment. Contractor is advised that prior to installation he must compare indicated electrical equipment ratings, wire sizes and quantities, conduit sizes and quantities and overcurrent protective device ratings versus approved shop drawings of actual equipment being furnished. Contractor shall provide electrical materials conforming to the requirements of the actual equipment being furnished, reflecting increased ratings, wire sizes and quantities, conduit sizes and quantities and overcurrent protective device ratings where required to match shop drawings. Overcurrent protective device ratings shall be decreased if required to match actual equipment requirements and/or manufacturer’s recommendation. Other electrical ratings, wire sizes and quantities and conduit sizes and quantities shall not be decreased to less than that indicated on the electrical Drawings.

B. Equipment short circuit interrupting and/or withstand ratings are indicated on

the Drawings and/or Specifications. These ratings equal or exceed design Engineer’s determination of approximate short circuit levels based on standard data available at the time of design. Such determinations often assume “worst condition” situations and allow for unknown / unavailable / unreliable data at time of design. Such data typically includes Utility Company available fault levels, service transformer ratings, type, location, etc. Also note that Engineer’s design may indicate equipment with higher ratings than required by specific application, in cases where there is a desire for standardization of equipment throughout the project. Contractor shall furnish equipment meeting these indicated ratings or shall furnish higher rated equipment if and when required based on the results of the Short Circuit Study (see Section 1.19). Advise Engineer and request clarification in such situations. In no case, shall equipment with ratings lower than those indicated on the Drawings and/or specified (per design Engineer’s determined values) be permitted.

C. Not used. D. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, all conduits shall be concealed

unless noted to be exposed. Exposed conduits shall only occur in rooms


1233 Page 16010 - 11

without ceilings like the main electrical and mechanical rooms, or the Gymnasium. Exposed conduits shall be installed in an orderly manner, running perpendicular or parallel to the building structure. Conduits shall run over beams where possible.

E. Where circuits are required or shown as “home-runs”, all necessary fittings and

boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. F. Verify with the Architect the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting

fixtures, switches and receptacles prior to installation. G. Any work installed contrary to or without approval by the Architect shall be

subject to change as directed by the Engineer, and no extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes.

H. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of equipment or conduit

runs. The locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as determined in field by Contractor, during construction, after coordination with the Owner and /or his designated representative and approval by the Architect. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work, and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Architect and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.

I. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported

by spacers (minimum 1/2 inch) to provide a clearance between wall and equipment.

J. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other

installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of equipment.

K. All connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance

with the approved shop and setting drawings. L. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the

Contractor’s use of an alternate item, arrangement of equipment, and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the work, either his own or others, caused by such redesign.

M. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of the different trades

so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum space and all such offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor without


Page 16010 - 12 1233

additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the Engineer is to decide which equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.

N. Where installation of new, active, conduit runs are called for or indicated in

the Contract Documents, in locations which will become “inaccessible” after installation is complete, (such as underground, or in concrete encasement, or in concrete slabs, or similar application), Contractor shall furnish and install spare conduits of similar type and size, for the entire “inaccessible” part of such conduit runs. The quantity of additional spare conduits shall be such that the number of additional spare conduits (or, with Engineer’s approval, the cumulative cross sectional area) shall be equivalent to 20% or more of the active conduits. Such spare conduits will generally not appear on the Drawings, but shall be included.

O. Conduits and cables called for or indicated per the Contract Documents as

having 8 or more installed control wires, shall be supplemented by Contractor to include 20% additional spare control wires. Where such additional wires require increase in conduit size, Contractor shall furnish and install larger conduit. Such spare wires will generally not appear on the Drawings, but shall be included.

P. Dimensions. Dimensions indicated on the Drawings related to electrical

equipment locations and /or clearances (relative to walls, column lines, other equipment, etc) are generally minimum clear dimensions to be maintained as per Code, AHJ, project and / or operating requirements. Such dimensions shall be maintained or exceeded, but not reduced, regardless of actual equipment sizes which will only be determined after approval of project specific manufacturer’s drawings. Concrete pads, vaults, structures, etc for electrical equipment, where dimensioned on the Drawings, are estimated dimensions based on typical catalog sizes of electrical equipment on which the design is based. Such dimensions shall be adjusted by Contractor if / as necessary based upon project specific approved manufacturer’s drawings.

1.6 PRIORITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. If during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance requirements shall be considered the equipment, material, device or installation method that represents the most stringent option, the highest quality, or the largest quantity.

B. In all cases, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, but work

not dimensioned shall be as directed by the Architect and work not particularly shown, identified, sized, or located shall be the same as similar work that is shown or specified.

C. Detailed drawings shall govern over general drawings, larger scale drawings

take precedence over smaller scale drawings and change order drawings shall


1233 Page 16010 - 13

govern over Contract Drawings. Contract Drawings shall govern over shop drawings.

D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the

provisions of the Contract Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or association, the provision of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more stringent or cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or between laws and regulations, the higher performance requirements shall be binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor

accepts the fact that compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time, nor limit in any way the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with all Laws and Regulations at all times.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions, and the Special Conditions, and copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following as listed in subparagraph B. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of submittals except where electronic submission, in the opinion of the Architect, places an undue burden on the Contractor or his Subcontractor. Electronic file shall be in Adobe (.pdf) format.

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following equipment:

1. Switchgear. 2. Unit Substations. 3. Switchboards and Panelboards. 4. Medium Voltage Motor Control Centers. 5. Low Voltage Motor Control Centers. 6. Transformers. 7. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. 8. Manholes, Pullboxes and Handholes, Frames and Covers. 9. Grounding Hardware and Connections. 10. Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Hangers.


Page 16010 - 14 1233

11. Wires and Cable. 12. Switches, Receptacles and Covers. 13. Fire Alarm System. 14. Other Div 16 Submittals as required per individual Specification

Sections.

C. The Manufacturer’s name and product designation and catalog numbers shall be submitted for the following material utilized:

1. Testing Equipment. 2. Ground System Resistance Test Equipment.

D. Prior to submittal, all shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and Contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked. In addition each shop drawing submitted shall include a copy of the applicable specification section, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justifications for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

E. The submittal review shall be only for conformance with the design concept of

the project and compliance with the Specification and Drawings. The submittal review shall not change the requirements of the Contract Documents, nor shall this review relieve the Contractor of errors in shop drawings. The responsibility of, or the necessity of, furnishing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings, which may not be indicated in the shop drawings, is included as work under this Section.

F. The responsibility for all dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job

site and for coordination of this work with the work of all other trades is also included under the work of this Section.

G. No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the submittal review

process has been completed.


1233 Page 16010 - 15

H. The Contractor shall submit for information electrical coordination/installation working drawings. See paragraph 1.8.

I. Submit Record Documents. See Paragraph 1.9. J. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals. See Paragraph 1.10.

1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare electrical coordination/installation working drawings to scale of 1/4” = 1’-0” or larger, detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of all raceway systems, equipment, and

materials. Include the following:

a. Size of equipment and clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

b. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. c. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. d. Equipment connections and support details. e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. f. Sizes and locations of man-holes, hand-holes, pull boxes, etc.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in

floors, walls, and ceilings, and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Particular attention shall be directed toward concealed and buried

conduit layouts. The drawings shall be prepared based on approved equipment shop drawings and shall accurately locate and dimension all conduit stub-ups. Contractor shall assure that no concrete floors or walls are poured until such layouts are approved.

5. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations,

air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communications systems components, and other ceiling-mounted devices.


Page 16010 - 16 1233

B. These coordination drawings shall be submitted for information only to Architect prior to installation by Contractor.

1.9 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents indicating installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed) dimensioned from

prominent building lines. 3. Approved substitutions, contract modifications, and actual equipment

and materials installed. 4. Record power one line diagrams, panel schedules, control diagram and

fire alarm riser diagrams 5. Contractor shall maintain one set of drawings in the field which is

marked as record drawings. These drawings shall be updated daily with information included herein. The Contractor shall make record drawings available for review by the Engineer at every field visit.

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals include the following information

for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-

in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and

troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit complete operations and maintenance data for all equipment furnished under this Division. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for the installation and shall include all required cuts,


1233 Page 16010 - 17

drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, complete parts list, etc, that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.

1.11 MATERIALS

A. The materials used in all systems shall be new, unused and as hereinafter specified. All materials where not specified shall be of the very best of their respective kinds. Sample of materials or Manufacturers shall be submitted for approval as required by the Engineer.

B. All current carrying cables, wires, buses, terminals, windings, parts, etc. shall

be copper. C. Equipment shall be suitable in all ways for the intended application. Ratings

shall match or exceed the requirements of the indicated Reference Standards, Drawings and Specifications. Electrical short circuit interrupting ratings shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 110. Additionally, electrical equipment shall have fully rated interrupting ratings; equipment having certified “series” rated interrupting capabilities from the manufacturer shall not be considered as acceptable, unless prior written approval is received from the Engineer.

D. Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately

protected against mechanical damage, water damage, corrosion, dirt, dust and foreign material. Equipment equipped with internal electrical heaters shall have them energized to keep the equipment dry. Doors to cabinets, panelboards, motor control centers, switchgear, control panels and other similar equipment shall be kept closed at all times when work on them is not being done. Switchgear, motor control center, panelboards and similar Electrical equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Such Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner, the damaged units or systems shall remain on site and returned to the manufacturer after the replacement units or systems have been delivered to the site. Under no circumstances will electrical equipment damaged by water be rehabilitated or repaired, new equipment shall be supplied, and all costs associated with replacement shall be borne by the Contractor.

E. Any damage to factory applied paint finish shall be repaired using touch-up

paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. The entire damaged panel or section shall be repainted per the field painting specification, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.12 CODES, INSPECTIONS AND FEES

A. All equipment, materials, procedures and installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including federal, state and local Authorities and Owner-representative Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


Page 16010 - 18 1233

B. Contractor shall obtain all necessary forms, permits, inspections, certificates of

acceptance, certificates of occupancy, etc. Contractor shall complete all forms and pay all fees related to these items. Contractor shall submit to the appropriate Authority Having Jurisdiction all necessary documentation, including Drawings, calculations, load summaries, safety plans, work execution plans, schedules, etc., all in the format and quantity as required by the governing Authority Having Jurisdiction. These permits, inspections, and certificates shall cover all aspects of the electrical systems, including the fire alarm system. The permits, inspections and certificates shall be obtained by Contractor from the appropriate Authority Having Jurisdiction including, but not limited to, building departments, inspection authorities, plan review examiners, fire marshals, insurers, utility suppliers, etc.

C. Obtain required inspection stickers indicating installation suitability from

appropriate Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Install as directed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

B. Inspect products for completeness and conditions; if it is to be stored, reseal

for protection; unpack and handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Store products in dry spaces, free from corrosives. Heat storage areas to

prevent condensation, and dust free. Keep equipment clean by covering or by other measures as necessary. Store shipping sections on level surfaces.

D. Store equipment and material under cover, and off the ground or floors

exposed to rain. E. For outdoor storage, protection covers of 10 mil thick black sheet plastic shall

be fitted. Covers shall be reinforced to withstand wind and precipitation. Set materials on skid or platforms of height to avoid damage or deterioration from spattering and ground waste.

1.14 TESTS AND SETTINGS

A. Test all systems furnished under Division 16 and repair or replace all defective work. Make all necessary adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner’s personnel in the proper operation of the systems.

B. Complete all work as detailed in project Specification “Acceptance Testing

and Calibration”.


1233 Page 16010 - 19

C. Make the following minimum tests and checks prior to energizing electrical equipment. Tests shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and suggestions, referenced industry standards and with the requirements outlined in the specific Sections of the Specifications.

1. Mechanical inspection, testing and setting of all circuit breakers,

disconnect switches, motor starters, control equipment, etc. for proper operation.

2. Test grounding system. 3. Test switchgear and switchboards. 4. Test fire alarm system. 5. Test motor control centers. 6. Test transformers. 7. Test wires and cables. 8. Test substations and protective relaying. 9. Test variable frequency drives / controllers 10. Check all wire and cable terminations. Verify to the Engineer

connections meet the equipment’s torque requirements. Verify control wire continuity via bell / buzzer test. Megger all power wire and cable. Record all results.

11. Field set all transformers taps as required in order to obtain the proper

secondary voltage. 12. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings

for proper lubrication.

13. Check the ampere rating of all thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the Engineer of same, as well as locations and designations, listing the nameplate service factor, horsepower, and full load current. If inconsistencies are found, new thermal elements shall be supplied and installed by this Contractor.

14. Check rotation of all motors, obtain permission from the Engineer to

start the motors, and proceed to check it for proper rotation. If it rotates in the wrong direction, correct the rotation at the motor. Take all necessary precautions not to damage any equipment.

15. Carefully check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each

system, and/or part of a system to ascertain that the system will


Page 16010 - 20 1233

function properly and as indicated by schematic and wiring diagrams where applicable.

16. Provide all instruments, personnel and equipment required for the tests

specified herein.

D. All testing shall be scheduled and coordinated by the Contractor. Notify the Owner at least two (2) weeks in advance of conducting tests. The Contractor shall have qualified personnel present during all testing.

E. The following additional tests and checks shall be made prior to the energizing

of electrical equipment. Contractor shall engage the services of an independent testing firm. Tests shall be conducted by the independent testing firm, and a certified test report shall be submitted stating that the equipment meets and operates in accordance with the manufacturers and job specifications, and that equipment and installation conforms to all applicable standards and specifications:

1. Testing of protective relays for calibration and proper operation. 2. Over potential, high potential, insulation resistance, and shield

continuity tests for cables. 3. Mechanical inspection of switches and circuit breakers to assure proper

operation. 4. Infra-red hot spot inspection shall be made of all switchgear, switches,

power and control panels. This shall be done under representative load conditions before the equipment is used by the Owner and again three (3) months before expiration of the one (1) year warranty period.

5. Three (3) copies of certified test reports shall be furnished to the

Engineer for all tests.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for supply of all electrical equipment, components, systems, and qualified manpower, as applicable, to provide for and execute complete electrical testing, system testing and acceptance testing and calibration as specified in the Contract Documents and / or as required. Include testing submittal preparation, testing plan, scheduling, start-up procedures, functional testing, attendance at meetings, testing results recording and documentation, demonstration and training, operations and maintenance manuals, and project close out data (bonds, warranties, spare parts, record documents and maintenance service agreements).

G. Set all relays, protective devices, breakers, etc. in accordance with findings and

recommendations of the Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study and of the equipment manufacturer.

1.15 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES


1233 Page 16010 - 21

A. Provide Manufacturer’s services for testing and start-up of the following

equipment:

1. Switchgear Minimum three (3) days, two (2) trips. 2. Unit Substation Minimum two (2) days, one (1) trip. 3. Low Voltage Motor Minimum two (2) days, two (2) trips. Control Centers / VFDs 4. Medium Voltage Motor Minimum three (3) days, two (2) trips. Control Center / VFDs 5. Transformers Minimum one (1) day, one (1) trip. 6. Switchboards / Switchgear Minimum one (1) day, one (1) trip.

B. The Manufacturers of the above listed equipment shall provide an experienced Field Service Engineer to accomplish the following tasks:

1. The equipment shall be visually inspected upon completion of

installation and prior to energization to assure that wiring is correct, interconnection complete and the installation is in compliance with the Manufacturer’s criteria. Documentation shall be reviewed to assure that all Drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, parts list and other data required to check out and sustain equipment operation is available on-site. Documentation shall be red-lined to reflect any changes or modifications made during the installation to assure correct type and quantity.

2. The Field Service Engineer shall provide engineering support during the

energization and check-out of each major assembly. They shall perform any calibration or adjustment required for the equipment to meet the Manufacturer’s performance specifications.

3. Upon satisfactory completion of equipment test, they shall provide

engineering support of system tests to be performed in accordance with Manufacturer’s test specifications.

4. Three (3) four (4) hour training sessions (one for each system) on

operation, and three (3) four (4) hour training sessions (one for each system) on maintenance and trouble-shooting procedures shall be provided for the Owner’s maintenance personnel. All training shall be conducted at a facility provided by the Owner. The maintenance and trouble-shooting sessions shall be conducted with record “as-built” electrical drawings sufficient for a class of eight (8) personnel.

5. A final report shall be written and submitted by Contractor within

fourteen (14) days from completion of final system testing. The report


Page 16010 - 22 1233

shall document the inspection and test activities, define any open problems and recommend remedial action.

6. A certificate of proper installation shall be issued by the manufacturer

of the following equipment:

a. Switchgear. b. Unit substations. c. Switchboards. d. Motor control centers. e. Transformers. f. Variable speed drives / controllers g. Fire alarm system. h. Any other equipment as required by the Engineer.

1.16 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to

reach its final location. If necessary, the manufacturer shall be required to ship his material in sections sized to permit passing through such restricted areas in the structure.

B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to be

tilted for ease of passing through such restricted areas during transportation, the manufacturer shall be required to brace the equipment suitably, to insure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.

1.17 ENCLOSURE TYPES

A. Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, electrical

enclosures shall have the following ratings.

1. NEMA 1 for dry, non-process indoor locations. 2. NEMA 12 for locations subject to “DUST”. 3. NEMA 4X for outdoor locations, rooms below grade (including basements

and buried vaults), “DAMP” and “WET” locations. Enclosure material shall be stainless steel or carbon steel with baked or electrostatically applied enamel finish. NEMA 3R may be substituted outdoors only where specifically indicated on the Drawings.


1233 Page 16010 - 23

4. NEMA 4X for “CORROSIVE” locations. Enclosure material shall be stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester.

1.18 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. All equipment, materials, and installation techniques used in areas designated

as hazardous in the Specification Sections, or on the Contract Drawings shall be in strict accordance with National Electrical Code Articles 500, 501, 502 and 503.

B. All equipment and materials used in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the

appropriate hazardous area classification.

1.19 COORDINATION, SHORT CIRCUIT AND OTHER STUDIES A. General:

1. The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional electrical engineer, currently registered in the applicable state, to provide an Electrical Protective Device Coordination Study, an Electrical Short Circuit Study (for the power distribution and motor control equipment), and other Studies as defined herein. The Studies shall bear the engineer’s seal, license number and signature. The professional electrical engineer shall work with the approved switchgear manufacturer to provide these Studies for projects that have new switchgear. The Studies shall cover Coordination, Short Circuit, Harmonic Analyses and Arc-Flash as outlined herein.

2. Prior to major electrical equipment order placement, a preliminary

short circuit calculation / study shall be prepared by Contractor and submitted for review. The study shall verify the adequacy of the Contract Documents-indicated or specified short circuit and related ratings for all new equipment as well as that of existing affected equipment, to the extent applicable. In the unlikely case that the study calculations indicate available short circuit or related values exceeding indicated or specified ratings for new equipment, or exceeding existing equipment ratings, Contractor shall inform Engineer, request clarification, and await instruction prior to further action. In no case, in accordance with NEC, shall equipment with ratings below calculated values be applied. After review and acceptance of the preliminary calculation / study, Contractor shall use it as a basis for preparation and submittal for review of a complete, thorough and detailed study, as specified herein.

3. The study shall also include the utility company’s protective devices, all

switchgear, all feeders, all switchboards, all MCC’s and all panelboards. Every overcurrent and protective device shall be included in the study. The study shall include all electrical systems including those utility powered, on-site powered, generator powered, or other source


Page 16010 - 24 1233

powered. Include all “emergency systems”, “legally required standby systems”, “optional standby systems” and COPS systems as defined in NEC. All devices shall be evaluated for short circuit capabilities and shall be electrically coordinated as required by code and to the extent practical. Graphic indication of coordination shall be furnished in the form of a clearly labeled and identified composite drawing showing time-current curves of system protective devices. Time-current curves of each device shall also be furnished. Results and recommended settings shall be summarized in a clear and concise tabulation.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying with the

Electric Utility Provider all information needed to conduct this study. This includes, but is not limited to, actual service transformer KVA rating, impedance and available fault current.

5. The Contractor shall set all protective devices and relays based on this

coordination study to provide coordinated, selective protection for all equipment supplied or affected by the installation under this Contract.

6. The Contractor shall provide data necessary to perform the study. This

includes feeder cable sizes, approximate feeder length, motor data, switchgear data, existing protective relay settings and any other information relevant to the study.

7. A summary of the short circuit analysis shall be provided by the

Contractor at the time shop drawings for all of the new equipment is submitted for approval.

8. Where applicable, for projects that expand existing facilities, the

Contractor shall investigate the existing distribution system and prepare an up-to-date single line diagram for the existing system. The Contractor shall provide necessary information to clearly represent an existing single line diagram as required in order to perform the coordination and short-circuit study.

B. Scope:

1. The short circuit study shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard C37.010 and C37.13, shall be performed to check the adequacy, and to verify the correct application of circuit protective devices and other system components specified. Where applicable, the study shall address the case when the system is being powered from the normal source as well as from the alternate source. Minimum as well as maximum possible fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the study.

2. Fault contribution of all motors shall be considered. The Contractor

shall be responsible for obtaining all required data of equipment. All back-up calculations shall become part of the final report. The calculations shall be in sufficient detail to allow easy review.


1233 Page 16010 - 25

C. Contents:

1. The study shall include representation of the power company’s systems, the base quantities selected, impedance source data, calculation methods and tabulations, one-line and impedance diagrams, conclusions and recommendations. Short circuit momentary duties, shall be calculated on the basis of an assumed bolted three-phase short circuit at each medium voltage bus, low voltage switchboard bus, switchboards, motor control centers, distribution panelboards, pertinent branch circuit panelboards, and other significant locations through the systems. The short-circuit tabulations shall include significant X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, KVA, and symmetrical fault current.

2. A protective device time current coordination study shall be included

with coordination plots of key and/or limiting protective devices, tabulated data, rating, and/or settings selected. The study shall present an engineering balance between the competing objectives of protection and continuity of service for the system specified, taking into account the basic factors of sensitivity, selectivity and speed. In addition to including all facility “normal” utility powered and / or generator powered electrical power systems, the coordination study shall include all protective devices utilized in emergency systems, legally required standby systems and elevator systems in order to confirm selective coordination to the extent required by the NEC.

3. Separate plots shall be provided for each mode of “normal” and

“alternate” operation. Maximum fault values shall be shown in each case. Both power sources shown in one plot will not be accepted.

4. Where applicable, existing protective device settings shall be reviewed

to ensure selectivity under the new conditions. Recommended changes shall be indicated in the report.

5. Required settings for breakers and relays shall be maximized to provide

the most effective protection possible whether the system is fed from the normal or emergency source, where applicable.

6. Tabulations indicating recommended set points for all protective

devices shall be provided. This shall include the normal as well as the alternate source.

D. Motor Current-Time Characteristic Curves:

1. A complete independent set of current-time characteristic curves for all medium voltage motor drives indicating coordination between the protective relays and the thermal characteristics of the motor shall be provided.


Page 16010 - 26 1233

2. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary information to perform the study from the motor suppliers.

E. Motor Starting Study:

1. A motor starting study for all large electric drives (100 horsepower and above) to determine voltage dip or power inrush limitations at selected locations due to starting of motors shall be provided. This applies to both the normal and the alternate mode.

F. General Information for Time-Current Curves Presentations:

1. The coordination plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagrams, legends, associated power company’s relay or system characteristics, significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters for power, and substation transformers, and complete operating brands for low-voltage circuit breaker trip devices.

2. The coordination plots shall define the types of protective devices

selected, together with the proposed coil taps, time-dial settings and pick-up settings required.

3. The short-time region shall indicate the medium voltage relay

instantaneous elements, the magnetizing in-rush, and ANSI withstand transformer parameters, the low-voltage circuit breaker instantaneous trip devices, fuse manufacturing to tolerance bands, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

4. Each primary protective device required for a delta-to-wye connected

transformer shall be selected so that the characteristic or operating band is within the transformer parameters; which, where feasible, shall include a parameter equivalent to 58 percent of the ANSI withstand point to afford protection for secondary line-to-ground faults.

5. Low-voltage power circuit breakers shall be separated from each other

and the associated primary protective device, where feasible, by a 16 percent current margin for coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults.

6. Protective relays shall be separated, where feasible, by a 0.3 second

time margin when the maximum three-phase fault flows, to assure proper selectivity.

G. Harmonic Analysis: 1. As part of the study, a harmonic analysis shall be performed. The study

shall utilize approved computer software and shall follow industry approved procedures in concurrence with IEEE recommended methodology. The effects of variable speed drives and other non-linear system components on the power system including power, current and voltage distortion shall be included.


1233 Page 16010 - 27

2. Where such analysis indicates power system calculated harmonic

content exceeding IEEE 519 and / or industry recommendations, the study shall identify possible mitigating solutions including, but not limited to, additional filters, isolators, reactors, etc. The study shall identify the recommended type of mitigating device(s), ratings, recommended system point(s) of application and calculated harmonic improvement.

H. Arc-Flash Analysis: A complete arc-flash analysis for the entire new and modified (as applicable)

electrical system shall be prepared and submitted by Contractor. Such analysis shall determine arc-flash hazard at all operator access points and provide recommendations for operator safety and precaution including protective clothing, danger / warning / hazard signs, floor markings of flash hazard extent, etc. All signs and floor markings shall be furnished and installed by Contractor in accordance with the study results and in accordance with code.

I. The coordination study shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2 inch X 11 inch size

report and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer. The final selection of all protective devices shall be based on a preliminary draft of the coordination study that shall be submitted with the equipment shop drawings for review. The completed study shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before any of the equipment is shipped. All protective devices shall be adjusted, tested, and calibrated in the field, prior to energizing the equipment, per the settings listed in the study. This work shall be performed by the Manufacturer as described in this section and prior to final acceptance by the Owner.

J. All protective devices, existing and new shall be calibrated and tested, as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer, by an independent testing firm. This work shall be accomplished under Section 16010.

1.20 WARRANTY

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model

numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

B. Provide a warranty for all electrical equipment in accordance with the general

requirements of specification. Unless specified more stringently elsewhere in the general requirements, the components of the electrical system shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, against defective materials, design and workmanship.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:

A. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer. In addition, major electrical items including switchgear, substations,


Page 16010 - 28 1233

switchboards, motor control centers, and power transformers shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION (See Applicable Division 16 Sections)


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Raceways & Boxes March 6, 2019

1233 Page 16100 - 1

SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical

wiring. B. See also requirements of SECTION 16119 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY

STRUCTURES as applies to the installation of underground electrical exterior electrical ductbanks, and direct buried conduits.

C. Fire alarm system conductors shall be in conduit. Other low voltage system conductors

can be plenum-rated cables in cable trays with Owner permission. Different system wiring shall not be mixed in trays unless they are bundled and tagged.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures,

and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NEC,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NEC. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard warranty after substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RGS: Rigid Steel Conduit (Type RMC) – UL-6; ANSI C80.1. Schedule 40 (Steel, Zinc-coated). B. IMC: Intermediate Metal (Steel, Zinc-coated) Conduit - ANSI C80.6, UL 1242. C. EMT: Electrical Metallic (Steel, Zinc-coated) Tubing - ANSI C80.3, UL797. D. FMC: Flexible Metal (Steel, Zinc-coated) Conduit – UL1. E. LFMC: Liquid-tight Flexible Metal (Steel, Zinc-coated) Conduit with PVC Jacket – UL 360.


Page 16100 - 2 1233

F. Fittings for Conduit and Tubing (Including all Types: Flexible and Liquid-Tight, and Cable):

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. Fittings for EMT shall be (Steel, Zinc-coated) or Die-cast, compression type only. Listed according to UL 514B.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RNC: Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit - NEMA TC 2, Type EPC, Schedule 40-PVC, unless

otherwise indicated. UL 651. B. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. UL 651. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1,

12 or 3R, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: As indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated,

with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.


1233 Page 16100 - 3

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.5 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS

A. Contractor must receive approval prior to installation of any surface mounted raceways.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company. 3. Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division.

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Surface (Mounted) Metal Raceways shall be Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Prime coating, ready for field painting per Section Painting. Color of Pre-painted Surface Metal Raceways (Raceway systems) may be selected from Manufacturer's standard colors, but shall then be submitted to Owner for pre-approval.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Galvanized Steel.

E. Meet UL5, UL5C as appropriate. 2.6 SURFACE NON-METALLIC RACEWAYS

A. Contractor must receive approval prior to installation of any surface mounted raceways.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company 4. Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division.

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Surface (Mounted) Nonmetallic Raceways shall be two-piece

construction, manufactured of rigid PVC. Surface texture and color of Pre-painted Surface Non-Metallic Raceways (Raceway systems) may be selected from Manufacturer's standard colors, but shall then be submitted to Owner for pre-approval.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Rigid PVC.

2.7 CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS


Page 16100 - 4 1233

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. MONO - Systems, Inc.

2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

3. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Cable Trays shall be (Steel, Zinc-coated) suitable for indoors. Corrosion resistant coating shall be by electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch (0.012 mm) thick. Cable trays shall be ladder tray with maximum rung spacing of 12 inches (455mm). Cable tray widths shall be as shown on plan drawings.

C. Cable trays for low voltage communication, voice, data, and similar wiring may be center-spline type.

D. Fittings and Accessories: (Steel, Zinc-coated) (configuration and rung spacing shall be the same as straight sections of cable tray).

2.8 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. UL 514A.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy Type FD, with gasketed cover.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

J. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.


1233 Page 16100 - 5

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.9 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel,

plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral water-stop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and

one or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 2.10 SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Modular sealing devices, shall be designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or

conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.


Page 16100 - 6 1233

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.11 GROUT FOR NEW EQUIPMENT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC, Schedule 40 PVC, suitable for direct burial. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

B. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7 requirements. Cable tray layout shown on Drawings provides cable tray diagrammatic routing. Field adjustment of cable tray route and elevation shall be set according to site conditions, and as specified herein.

C. Boxes and Enclosures, Outdoor, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or NEMA 4. D. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Outdoors or Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4 in damp

or wet locations.


1233 Page 16100 - 7

E. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. F. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. See 2.1

metallic raceway fittings. G. Flexible conduit shall be 6’ maximum length (for lighting connection whips only). Use

water-tight or PVC coated at other locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in PART

2 except where requirements on Contract Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Minimum conduit sizes shall be 3/4 inch exposed, and 1 inch embedded or direct buried. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install raceway systems to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. No horizontal conduits shall be installed less than 7’-0” clear.

D. Equipment: Install raceway systems to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Planning and installation of raceway system shall give to plumbing and

piping systems installed at a required slope (both exposed and embedded), and to building HVAC ducts above dropped ceilings.

F. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water

pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. G. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. H. Support raceways per NEC using compatible galvanized steel supports and hardware. I. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. J. Install no more than the equivalent of three (3) 90-degree bends in any conduit run except

for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. K. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise

indicated. All boxes shall remain accessible. Provide access where required. L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.


Page 16100 - 8 1233

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. ENT, RNC or Type EPC-40-PVC shall transition to RGS conduit, before rising above the

floor.

4. Conduits embedded in concrete slab shall not interfere with equipment or building structures. Interferences with embedded conduits stubbed-up at or beneath equipment shall also consider accessibility at such equipment. Interferences with embedded conduits shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and cost to remedy.

M. Stub-ups: Equipment drawings shall be used to determine where embedded conduits may

be stubbed-up at or beneath equipment. For all embedded conduits Contractor shall determine routing of conduit based on site conditions. Final stub-up locations (entry/exit) into equipment inside electrical rooms and at each site area shall be field coordinated and determined by Contractor.

N. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating

bushings to protect all conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with

not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 24 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

P. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install lengths between boxes as

follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two (2) 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of

raceway unless Contract Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill

them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NEC.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is

located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 degrees F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.


1233 Page 16100 - 9

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 degrees F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 degrees F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 degrees F temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 degrees F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed

and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry

block, and install box flush with surface of wall. U. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. V. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor

surface. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 – Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Conductors & Cables March 6, 2019

1233 Page 16120 - 1

SECTION 16120 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NEC,


B. Comply with NEC. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard warranty after Substantial Completion and

minimum of one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. Cerrowire 2. Service Wire Company 3. Okonite 4. Belden

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Copper Conductors shall comply with NEMA WC 70.


Page 16120 - 2 1232

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Conductor Insulation shall comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN, XHHW, USE and SE.

D. Basis-of-Design Product: Multi-Conductor Cable shall comply with NEMA WC 70 for

armored cable, Type AC, metal-clad cable, Type MC, Type SE, and Type USE with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corporation

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices shall be of size, ampacity rating,

material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel,

plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral water-stop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of Section

Firestopping. 2.4 SLEEVE SEALS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


1233 Page 16120 - 3

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or

conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION, APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance:

1. Type SE or USE multi-conductor cable, in raceway, in concrete, or 2. Type XHHW, single conductor in raceway, and in concrete.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,

single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, Below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-

THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors

in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single

conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, Below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type

THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with

stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


Page 16120 - 4 1232

J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,

that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables as required per NEC. Use UL- approved materials F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to SECTION 16195 -

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.” B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or

formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls, where applicable.

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall

assemblies. Use fire rated poke- through, Hubbell type FRPT suitable for specific application, or approved equivalent.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.


1233 Page 16120 - 5

F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and

with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between

sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant.”

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire-rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. K. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

L. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size

sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable

material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section Firestopping. 3.7 CONDUCTOR SIZING A. Sizes shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Where conductor size is not shown on

the Contract Drawings, the minimum size shall be: 1. Power wiring and branch circuits: As indicated below, but no smaller than No. 12

AWG. 2. Control wiring: No. 14 AWG. 3. For circuits rated 100 Amperes or less, where conductor size is not shown on the

Contract Drawings, Contractor shall select conductor with ampacity rating to match


Page 16120 - 6 1232

the circuit breaker rating shown in the panel schedule. Provide 75/90 degrees C rated wire, but base ampacity on 60 degrees C rated wire as per NEC Article 110-14C.

4. For circuits rated over 100 Amperes, where conductor size is not shown on the

Contract Drawings, Contractor shall select conductor with ampacity rating to match the circuit breaker rating shown in the panel schedule. Provide 75/90 degrees C rated wire, but base ampacity on 75 degrees C rated wire as per NEC Article 110-14 C.

B. Where required, Contractor shall increase branch circuit conductor sizes to limit

maximum voltage drop to 3 percent. C. Where required, Contractor shall increase feeder conductor sizes to limit maximum

voltage drop to 2 percent. D. Below grade installations shall meet minimum cover requirements per NEC Table 300-5.

Install warning ribbon above all underground installations. The ribbon’s depth relative to the underground installation shall meet the NEC, where applicable.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been

energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after

Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument Infrared Scanning: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements.


1233 Page 16120 - 7

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Wiring Devices March 6, 2019

1233 Page 16140 - 1

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), special

receptacles, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for

premarking wall plates. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'

packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NEC,


B. Comply with NEC. C. Outdoor receptacles shall be housed in weatherproof enclosures which permit closure

while electrical cord is in use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

Manufacturers' names may also be used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 3. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division (Hubbell). 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).


Page 16140 - 2 1232

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), CRB5352S (duplex). 2. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). 3. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).

4. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Pass & Seymour; 2084. 2. Cooper; GF20

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFIC) Receptacles shall be straight blade configuration, feed and non-feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. Duplex GFCI Receptacles shall be rated 125V, 20 A.

2.4 ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering


1. Pass & Seymour; IG5362

2. Hubbell; CR5352IG

B. Basis–of-Design Product: Isolated Ground Receptacles shall be straight blade configuration, feed and non-feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Receptacles shall be rated 125V, 20 A.

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single-pole), 20AC2 (two-pole), 20AC3 (three-way),

20AC4 (four-way).


1233 Page 16140 - 3

2. Cooper; 2221 (single-pole), 2222 (two-pole), 2223 (three-way), 2224 (four-way). 3. Hubbell; CS1221 (single-pole), CS1222 (two-pole), CS1223 (three-way), CS1224 (four-

way). 4. Leviton; 1221-2 (single-pole), 1222-2 (two-pole), 1223-2 (three-way), 1224-2 (four-

way). B. Basis–of-Design Product: Snap Switches shall comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20, and shall

be rated 120/277V, 20 A. 2.6 PILOT LIGHT SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR 2. Cooper; 2221PL (single-pole) 3. Hubbell; HPL1221PL

4. Leviton; 1221-PLR

B. Basis–of-Design Product: Pilot Light Switches shall comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20, and

shall be rated 120/277V, 20 A. Pilot Light Switches shall be Single pole, with Red neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

2.7 KEY OPERATED SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L 2. 3. Cooper; 2221L (single-pole) 4. Hubbell; HPL1221L

5. Leviton; 1221-2L

B. Basis–of-Design Product: Key Operated Switches shall comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20,

and shall be rated 120/277V, 20 A. Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.8 MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering



Page 16140 - 4 1232

1. Pass & Seymour; 1251L 2. Cooper; 1995L 3. Hubbell; HBL1557L

4. Leviton; 1257L

B. Basis–of-Design Product: Momentary Contact Switches shall comply with NEMA WD 1 and

UL 20, and shall be rated 120/277V, 20 A. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

2.9 TAMPER RESISTANT DEVICES A. Finish type which shall also meet the requirements of NEC 406.

1. Internal mechanism to limit access to energized internal components. 2. Furnish in locations per Drawings.

2.10 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: .302 Stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: .302 Stainless steel. 4. Material for Damp and Wet Locations: Outdoor type, acrylic spring loaded cover. UL

certified as weatherproof (While-In-Use) type. 2.11 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush-type, suitable for wiring method used. Where applicable, use dual

service units. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Rectangular and solid brass with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening. F. Poke-Through Electrical Floor Box shall be fire-rated and of the type indicated in the

drawings.


1233 Page 16140 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless

otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall

finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete,

dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a

joint unless the joint is trowel flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated

on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.

Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NEC,

Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to

connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until

installation.


Page 16140 - 6 1232

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in

length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 or 20 A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally

mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and

remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturer’s device listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush with long dimension

vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

I. Isolated Ground Receptacles: Run a separate insulated grounding wire to each receptacle

circuit. J. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Run a separate neutral for each circuit. Multi-wire branch

circuits shall not be permitted. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with SECTION - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.


1233 Page 16140 - 7

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-, white-, and red-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105V to 132V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15 A Load: A value of 4 percent or higher is not

acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.



1233 page 16716-1

SECTION 16716 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Communication backbone cabling including all wiring and equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Owner.

B. Contractor shall furnish conduits through cross-corridor partitions and into MDF And IDF rooms and provide ‘ring and string’ capability for future install of data lines.



1233 page 16717-1

SECTION 16717 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Communication backbone cabling including all wiring and equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Owner.

B. Contractor shall furnish conduits extending from outlets to above corridor ceiling, through cross-corridor partitions and into MDF And IDF rooms; include ‘ring and string’ accessories to assist future install by others.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Fire Alarm Devices March 6, 2019

1233 Page 16721 - 1

SECTION 16721 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DEFINITIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This Section includes furnishing and installing electrical conductors and raceways for the

system described herein. Conductors and raceways shall meet the requirements specified in the specifications listed below: SECTION 16100 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 16112 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16120 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 16195 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING

1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes a complete Fire Alarm System (FAS), including panels, manual sta-

tions, detectors, signal equipment, controls, and devices. The system shall be a com-plete, addressable, functional, code compliant system. It shall be furnished, installed, tested, coordinated, documented, and certified by Contractor under this section.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

Division 13 Section Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems for coordinating flow, pressure, and valve tamper switch requirements.

C. Each site structure shall have its own fire alarm system and control panel capable of op-erating independently of systems in the other structures. However, each structure fire alarm panel shall be interconnected via redundant fiber optic loop to the other structures fire alarm panels and a main fire alarm panel in one supervised, centralized location. Alarms from each structure shall be directed to the centralized location.

D. Contractor shall coordinate with Mechanical and furnish, provide, install, configure, and

program all equipments and materials necessary to monitor and control the diesel driven fire pump, and to interface the fire pump to the fire alarm system, to meet local Codes, and Owner and AHJ requirements.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


Page 16721 - 2 1232

A. General: Addressable, microprocessor-based fire detection and alarm system with manual

and automatic alarm initiation. System shall be ADA compliant and suitable. B. Signal Transmission: Multiplex signal and transmission dedicated to fire alarm service on-

ly. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and equipment to install a complete and operable

NFPA 72 compliant Fire Alarm System (FAS). System provided by the Contractor shall have the minimum features and capabilities as described herein.

D. System Integration: The Fire Alarm System (FAS) shall be fully capable of integrating with

the following systems: Access Control System (ACS) and the Intercommunication (INTERCOM) System. “Integrated” for purposes of this specification, means “appearing or being as one,” a single system based on a scalable distributed architecture, in which vari-ous components can be seamlessly plugged in through well defined "open interfaces,” be-have as an integral part of this system, and be fully programmed and monitored from a single point, with software which presents itself with a uniform user interface regardless of which portion of the system is involved.

The intent is to require the Fire Alarm System to be a stand alone system but fully capa-ble of integrating, including monitoring and control, with the access control and intercom systems through communications interface and/or dry contacts. Such integration is re-quired in case of automatic door unlock, all call announcement, and etc., as required by Codes and/or AHJ. Since other low voltage systems are not part of Division 16, the fire alarm system is specified as stand alone. The idea of combining these systems is not re-jected, but will be considered if submitted after contract award.

E. Contractor shall provide a Fire Alarm System (FAS) having state of the art equipment.

Throughout the life of the contract the Contractor shall evaluate and propose items of equipment that demonstrate enhancements over the following described equipment/ components.

F. Fire Alarm System (FAS) shall include all devices required for a complete and fully func-

tional system. FAS will monitor all alarm points, including manual fire-alarm boxes, smoke detectors, heat detectors, magnetic door holders, notification appliances and other initi-ating devices.

G. Fire Alarm System (FAS) controllers shall include input points, communication bus, and

provide line supervision that detects and annunciates communications interruptions or compromised communications. FAS controllers shall also provide for zone addressing and be capable of Voice Evacuation.

H. Visual Alarm indication: By xenon-strobe-type units. I. Automatic and fail safe mechanical equipment control (air handlers, fans, elevators,

smoke dampers, etc). J. System connections for alarm-initiating and alarm-indicating circuits: Class A Wiring. K. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available Manufacturers offer-

ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:


1233 Page 16721 - 3

1. EST – Edwards System Technology (Division of United Technologies)

2. Simplex - Grinnell 3. NOTIFIER - Honeywell Company

1.4 REFERENCES A. Publications listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. The publi-

cations are referred to in the text by basic designations only. B. FAS system equipment shall be UL listed, and installed in accordance with NFPA Stand-

ards, UL Standards and all applicable codes and Manufacturer’s printed instructions. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications listed below shall be applied in the specific edition listed. If no specific edi-tion is listed here, then the applicable version shall be the latest edition in effect as of the date of the invitation for bids, except as noted. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) Approvals:

a. FM P7825 – Approval Guide. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems. b. NFPA 25 – Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Sys-tems. c. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. d. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code. e. NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. f. NFPA 92A – Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems. g. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code (with State Minimum Fire Safety Standards as issued by

the State Fire Marshal).

h. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

i. NFPA 780 – Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

j. NFPA 1221 – Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Emergency Services Communica-tion Systems.

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):


Page 16721 - 4 1232

a. ASME A17.1 – Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

a. UL FPED – Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

b. UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire Protective Signaling

Systems.

c. UL 217 – Standard for Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms.

d. UL 268 – Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems.

e. UL 464 – Standard for Audible Signal Appliances.

f. UL 632- Electrically Actuated Transmitters.

g. UL 864 – Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.

h. UL 1971 – Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.

i. UL 497 – Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits.

j. UL 1449 – Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

6. Georgia Accessibility Code: Rules and Regulations of the Safety Fire Commissioner, Chapter 120-3-20, (Georgia) State Minimum Fire Safety Standards.

7. ADA Public Law 101-336.

8. FCC Compliance-Equipment shall comply with FCC Emission Standard specified in Part

15, subparagraph J for Class “A”.

9. Listing and Labeling: Provide systems and equipment specified in this Section that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

a. The terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in the National Electrical Code, Ar-

ticle 100.

10. See also Spec 16010 Part 1 for listing of applicable standards.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections.


1233 Page 16721 - 5

B. Product Data for each component specified, including detailed Manufacturer’s specifica-tions. Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Show access and workspace requirements.

C. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signal, and con-

trol systems and differentiating clearly between Manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations and routings of raceway connections. E. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. F. System operation description covering this specific Project, including method of operation

and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer’s standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable.

G. Operating instructions for mounting at the fire alarm panel(s). H. Maintenance data for products to include in operation and maintenance manuals as fol-lows:

1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation. 2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components. 3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components are recommended to be stored at

the site for ready access. 4. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that

carry stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. I. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of fire alarm system components certifying

that their products comply with specified requirements. J. Calculations for System shall be provided which shows the following:

1. Voltage Drop Calculations – Voltage drop calculations shall list the percentage of volt-age drop. All notification appliance circuit(s) shall be sized with maximum 10% voltage drop at 24 volts, with the last device operating no less than 21.6 volts.

2. Battery Power Calculations – Standby battery calculations shall list the type of devices (detection, monitoring, control, notification, etc.), and quantities, and shall include unit and extended amperage draw for quiescent and alarm conditions, total amperage draw and battery amp-hour rating. For design criteria, the calculated load shall be the design load plus the required 25% spare capacity. In addition, the battery capacity used to meet the calculated load shall be a maximum of 80 percent of the amp-hour rating listed by the manufacturer. De-rating of batteries shall be as required by the Manufacturer.


Page 16721 - 6 1232

3. Power Supplies – Power Supplies for Audible/Visible devices shall be sized to support 120% of the number of devices provided. Provide power supply calculations that in-clude all system requirements including any requirements for notification appliance circuits or any other auxiliary function powered by the system.

4. Duct Smoke Detectors - Calculations or measurements of air velocities shall be provid-ed to ensure duct detectors are installed within their UL listed range of airflow and placed appropriately to achieve required air stream sampling.

K. Submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routing submission of the

above material, make an identical submission to the authorities having jurisdiction. In-clude copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments from the authorities having jurisdiction, submit them for review. Re-submit if required to make clarifications or revisions to ob-tain approval. Submittals shall be approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction prior to submitting them for review.

L. Record of field tests of system. M. Complete software documentation. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized Representa-

tive of the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer to supervise installation of the system. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage firms experienced in manufacturing systems and

equipment similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in service performance.

C. Service Center: Select a system manufacturer who maintains a service center capable of

providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with a twenty-four (24) hour maximum response time.

D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire alarm components from a single source who shall

assume responsibility for compatibility of system components. Each and all components of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufac-turer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “UL” label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as sin-gle control unit. Partial listings shall NOT be acceptable.

E. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local

ordinances, and regulations, and the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. F. The Manufacturer shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in smoke detec-

tion and fire alarm systems. This organization shall employ factory trained and NICET cer-tified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within 50 miles of this project location. The Manufacturer and service organization shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the fire protective signaling systems industry.

1.7 WARRANTY


1233 Page 16721 - 7

A. Special Warranty for IDS and Components:

1. Submit a written Warranty agreeing to correct system deficiencies and replace com-

ponents that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period when installed and used according to the Manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not limiting, other rights the Owner may

have under other provision of the Contract Documents. 3. The minimum warranty period shall be one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Com-

pletion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Manual Stations: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of manual stations installed,

minimum of six (6).

B. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than one (1).

C. Horn / Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not

less than one (1).

D. Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type in-stalled, but not less than one (1) of each type.

E. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type in-

stalled, but not less than one (1) of each type. 1.9 CONTRACT DRAWINGS INTERPRETATION A. Fire alarm system supplier is advised that fire system unit equipment and device quanti-

ties shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate and shall be increased by system supplier if / as required to conform to applicable codes and / or AHJ requirements and / or fire alarm system supplier’s own requirements. Such equipment quantity increases are considered incidental to the overall system and will not be considered as source for addi-tional compensation. Additionally, quantities indicated are considered to be representa-tive of minimum quantities, and shall not be decreased by supplier. All such added equipment shall be reflected on fire alarm system supplier’s drawings, plans and bills of materials submitted for approval.

B. Locations of fire alarm equipment and devices shown on the Contract Drawings are ap-

proximate. Fire alarm system supplier shall adjust and modify locations if /as required to conform to applicable codes and / or AHJ requirements and / or fire alarm system suppli-er’s own requirements. Additional adjustments and modifications to locations shall be made if / as deemed necessary to improve functionality, visibility and / or audible effec-tiveness. Such equipment and device location adjustments and modifications are consid-ered incidental and will not be considered cause for additional compensation. Such loca-


Page 16721 - 8 1232

tion adjustments and modifications shall be reflected on fire alarm system supplier’s drawings and plans submitted for approval.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Enclosures: Flush-mounted and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on Drawings.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

B. Service Conditions for Outdoor Equipment: All outdoor mounted FAS compo-

nents/equipment will be rated for continuous operation including the following ranges of environmental conditions except as otherwise indicated:

1. Temperature ranges: 10 F to 150 F.

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 100%.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Include the following system functions and operating features plus those additional func-

tions and features required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction:

1. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first signal initiat-ed. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first signal shall not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals tale precedence over signals of lower priority, even though the lower priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received.

2. Non-interfering: Address, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal from one

device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. All circuits shall be manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are re-stored to normal. Systems that require batteries or battery back-up for the program-ming function are unacceptable.

3. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Response, General Alarm: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm-initiating or of supervisory-operating devices as described herein shall cause an FACP General Alarm.

4. Manual station alarm operation shall initiate a general alarm. 5. Water-flow alarm switch operation shall:


1233 Page 16721 - 9

a. Initiate a general alarm. b. Cause flashing of the device location-indicating lamp for the device that has

operated.

6. Initial smoke detection and/or sprinkler valve tamper switch operation and/or system malfunction or trouble shall initiate the following:

a. A supervisory, audible, and visible “trouble” signal indication at the FACP and

the annunciator. b. The location-indicating light to flash for the device that has operated. c. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. d. A subsequent (second) receipt of smoke detection from a nearby station shall

initiate a general alarm.

7. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station.

8. Silencing at the FACP: Switch type. Provide capability for acknowledgment of alarm,

supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible signal and light a light-emitting diode (LED). Subsequent alarms shall cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced by switch operation. Re-storing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions to normal shall extinguish the asso-ciated LED and cause the audible signal to sound again until restoration is acknowl-edged by switch operation.

9. Loss of primary power at the FACP shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP and the an-

nunciator. An emergency power light shall be illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.

10. Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm- and supervisory-initiating

devices is annunciated both on the FACP and on the annunciator, indicating location and type of device.

11. Both the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the Annunciator shall be equipped with the fire

drill function. Contractor shall provide all programming and configuration for the fire drill function, and provide training to staff.

12. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Display plain-English-language descriptions and addresses

of initiating devices, alarms trouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and component status, and system commands.

2.3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CIRCUITRY AND SIGNALING A. Fire-Alarm System Signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm-notification appliances. 2. Identify fire alarm at individual fire-alarm control units and remote annunciator.


Page 16721 - 10 1232

3. Transmit a fire alarm signal to the remote telephone dual-dialer in the building Intru-sion Detection System panel.

4. Building security system integral telephone dual-dialer shall transmit an alarm signal

to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. Coordinate with

Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Owner on whether the release of stairwell doors shall be activated via any general alarm or local alarm only.

7. Remove power from smoke dampers and smoke-fire dampers, causing them to close. 8. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm

mode. 9. Activate emergency lighting control. 10. Activate emergency shut-offs for gas and fuel supplies. 11. Record events in the FACP System memory.

B. Fire-Alarm System Supervisory Signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following

devices and/or actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch of a sprinkler system. 2. Low-air Pressure Switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.

3. Status monitoring of smoke dampers and smoke-fire dampers “end-switches” indicat-

ing open-closed status of dampers. C. Fire Alarm System Trouble Signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devic-

es and /or actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of primary power at Fire-Alarm Control Unit (FACP).

4. Ground or a single break in Fire-Alarm Control Unit (FACP) internal circuits.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at Fire-Alarm Control Unit (FACP).

6. Failure of battery charging, or break in battery circuitry.


1233 Page 16721 - 11

7. Abnormal position of any switch at Fire-Alarm Control Unit (FACP) or Remote Annunci-ator.

8. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.

9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system.

D. Fire Alarm System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate Notification Appliance if applicable and annunciate at Fire-Alarm Control Unit and Remote Annunciator.

2. Life Safety Equipment. All electrical disconnects for life safety equipment shall be

monitored by the Fire Alarm System, locked, or bypassed for life safety functions. Such bypass will be in strict conformance with the NEC Standards. All life safety func-tions controlled by the Fire Alarm System shall be arranged for direct control of the equipment, without reliance upon other non-fire alarm controls, which are not listed for life safety service.

3. Addressable interface modules shall also be provided for:

a. Control of primary and secondary elevator recall. b. Control of elevator power shunt.

c. Control of fire/smoke dampers.

d. Control of HVAC shutdown.

e. Control of magnetic door lock devices.

2.4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MONITORING COMPONENTS A. General - System devices shall be a Non-coded, and addressable with multiplexed signal

transmission, dedicated to Fire-Alarm service only. System shall also provide addressing of all system devices as well as an Addressable Interface to monitoring and control devices, and to Remote Fire Alarm Annunciator (FAA). Placement of wall and ceiling mounted de-vices shall be in accordance with this section and NFPA 72.

B. Fire-Alarm System Signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following system devic-es:

1. Manual Stations. Manual fire alarm stations shall annunciate by point. They shall con-sist of a housing, fitted with a pull-down lever, which when operated, locks in position to affect an alarm condition. Break glass front stations and glass rod type shall not be permitted. The body of the manual station shall be permanently attached to the back plate assembly. Resetting the station after operation shall require the use of a key that must be the same key as required for the fire alarm control panel.


Page 16721 - 12 1232

a. Double-action type, fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color.

b. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated, double pole, double throw, switch rat-ed for the voltage and current at which it operates. Stations have screw ter-minals for connections.

2. Area Smoke Detectors. Detector shall operate on the photoelectric or ionization prin-

ciple, and shall be plug-in type detectors that mount to a twist lock base, to prevent unauthorized removal of smoke detector heads. Detectors shall contain an alarm ini-tiating LED that will illuminate to signal activation of the detector. Detectors shall be listed by UL as “Smoke-Automatic Fire Detectors,” tested according to UL 268. Detec-tor spacing and location shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, the requirements of NFPA 72, and as indicated.

a. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated encapsulated electronic compo-

nents shall be mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. The plug connection shall require no springs for se-cure mounting and contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base shall ac-cept building wiring.

b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5- and 3.5-percent-per-foot (0.008- and 0.011-percent-per-mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268.

c. Sensor: An infrared detector light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. d. Color: White.

3. Duct Smoke Detectors. Duct smoke detectors shall be system operated type, photoe-

lectric detectors in a duct mounted housing equipped with air sampling tubes provid-ing airflow through the detector housing. Pendant mounted duct detectors shall not be permitted. Duct smoke detectors shall be listed or approved for that application including temperature and humidity listings. Each duct smoke detector shall be moni-tored individually via an integral, analog addressable element. Duct smoke detectors shall have sampling tubes which extend across the full width of the duct. The ends of the sampling tubes shall be accessible from outside the duct and shall be sealed with removable plugs (to facilitate detector testing). Sampling tubes shall be perforated type. Duct smoke detectors must have a test port to allow smoke entry testing without re-moval of the housing.

a. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied.

4. All Alarm-Initiating Devices: Shall be classified as addressable devices according to

NFPA 72.

a. Communication Transmitter and Receiver: Integral to device. Provide each device with a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.

b. External Addressable Interface Unit: May be used where specified devices are not manufactured and labeled with integral multiplex transmitter and receiver. Arrange to monitor status of each device individually.


1233 Page 16721 - 13

c. All fire alarm system alarm initiating devices shall be circuited by Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) as defined in NFPA 72.

d. Where non-addressable interface relays are required for control shutdown of equipment air handlers, fans, motor starters, smoke damper controllers, eleva-tors, smoke evacuation, etc, the status of these controlled/shutdown equip-ment shall be monitored by the FACP through use of addressable input relays (or equivalent monitors).

5. Automatic Sprinkler System Water Flow Switches. (Provided with sprinkler system) Ad-

dressable monitor modules shall be provided by Fire Alarm System Contractor to interconnect device to the Fire Alarm System.

6. Automatic Sprinkler System Water Valve Tamper Switches. (Provided with sprinkler

system) Addressable monitor modules shall be provided by Fire Alarm System Contrac-tor to interconnect device to the Fire Alarm System.

7. Low Air Pressure Switch. (Provided with dry-pipe sprinkler system) Addressable moni-

tor modules shall be provided by Fire Alarm System Contractor to interconnect device to the Fire Alarm System.

8. Natural Gas Supply Shut-off Valve Relay. (Provided with supply system) Addressable

monitor modules shall be provided by Fire Alarm System Contractor to interconnect device to the Fire Alarm System.

9. Heat Detectors. Heat detectors shall be of the fixed temperature/rate of rise type, re-

settable and listed for the environment in which they are installed. Addressable moni-tor modules shall be provided by Fire Alarm System Contractor to interconnect device to the Fire Alarm System.

10. Addressable Interface Modules. The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall provide, in-

stall, and test addressable circuit interface modules as necessary to comply with se-quence of operation matrix shown on Drawings. All circuit interfaces used for supervi-sory or control functions shall be mounted within 3-feet of the monitored or controlled point. If otherwise permitted by NFPA 72, and/or not physically possible to be within 3-feet, then select a location approved by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Audible / Visible Notification Appliances:

1. General - Notification Appliances shall be UL Listed. Combination Fire Alarm Notifica-

tion Appliances shall be flush mounted. All wiring to Notification Appliances shall be supervised and circuit shall perform in accordance with this specification. Placement of wall and ceiling mounted devices shall be in accordance with this section and NFPA 72.

2. Fire Alarm Horns - Fire alarm horns shall be listed in accordance with UL 464. Horn

shall have a sound rating of at least 85 decibels at 10-feet (3 m) as determined by the reverberant room test; data on peak output as determined in an anechoic chamber is not suitable. Horns shall be arranged to provide clearly audible signal distribution throughout the facility, of 15dbA above average ambient sound levels, or not less than


Page 16721 - 14 1232

5 dBA above the maximum ambient noise level. In no case shall horns produce a sound output on alarm more than 105 dBA. Where horns and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. If necessary, the Contractor shall provide supplemental power supplies located in electrical rooms or other similar space.

3. Visible Notification Appliances - Visible Notification Appliances shall be listed and

tested in accordance with UL 1971. Visible Notification Appliances shall activate any-time audible appliances are activated. This activation shall occur when the audible circuit is activated manually or automatically without operating additional switches. Actuation of alarm notification appliances or emergency voice communications and annunciation at the protected premises shall occur within 10 seconds after the activa-tion of an initiating device per NFPA 72.

4. Strobes: Strobes shall consist of a Xenon flash tube high intensity strobe lamp with

clear (nominal white) light having a flash rate of 1 to 3 flashes per second. The maxi-mum pulse duration shall be 2/10's of one second (0.2 seconds), with a maximum duty cycle of 40 percent. The pulse duration is defined as the time interval between initial and final points of 10 percent of maximum signal. The strobes shall be synchronized in accordance with NFPA 72.

5. Remote Alarm LED'S:

a. Non-addressable area smoke detectors and heat detectors installed above ceilings,

below computer floors, or in electrical closets, elevator machine rooms, or other mechanical areas that are normally locked, shall be provided with remote alarm LED's that illuminate when its associated detector(s) are in alarm.

b. Remote alarm LED's shall be ceiling or wall mounted directly outside the room, in

the corridor, where they will be readily visible to responding personnel. Locations are subject to Engineer's approval.

c. Remote alarm LED's shall be clearly and permanently labeled with engraved plastic

tags with, 5/8-inch white letters on red background. Labels shall identify the type and system address of its associated device(s) and the device location (i.e., room number).

6. Special alarm – indicating devices for visually impaired/hearing impaired shall be pro-vided and installed as necessary.

2.5 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Magnetic Door Holders shall be equipped for wall mounting and include

matching doorplate. Furnishing and installing of Door Holders shall also be coordinated with the Architect for finish and other hardware.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.


1233 Page 16721 - 15

4. See Section 08710 and Drawings for locations and additional information on doors with

wall magnets. 2.6 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT (FACP) A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit (Panel) shall be as noted below:

1. Mounting: Surface mounted cabinet, NEMA Type 1. Unless directed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), location of the FACP shall be as shown on Drawings. FACP and shall comply with UL 864.

2. Fire Alarm System shall be field-programmable through the FACP.

3. Fire Alarm System Control Panel (FACP) shall be installed and operate per NFPA, and

shall be designed with the System to provide coverage for all areas. Design intent is that the new system be totally interfaced and integrated with all applicable mechani-cal system, and will provide the facility with complete and comprehensive fire alarm coverage satisfactory to the AHJ, and meeting all codes.

4. Panel Electronics and Programming – Panel shall also include be of microprocessor-

based, modular, power-limited design, having electronic modules listed and labeled by a Na-tionally Recognized Testing Laboratory NRTL. FACP shall be designed with programma-ble software. a. Event Log - An event log with the ability to store three hundred (300) events in an

alarm log plus three hundred (300) events in a trouble/supervisory log. These events shall be stored in battery protected random access memory (RAM). System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

5. Panel Keypad - Arranged to permit entry and execution of System programming, con-

trol commands and other parameters. 6. Panel Display - A visible alpha/numeric LCD display indicating current status of the en-

tire system. The LCD display shall be a minimum 80-character visual alpha/numeric display. Under normal conditions the front panel shall display a “SYSTEM IS NORMAL” message or other approved message and the current time and date. Upon detection of an abnormal condition, the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash.

a. Panel display audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily

for trouble and supervisory conditions. Upon receipt of an off normal condi-tion, the LCD shall display the 40-character custom location label, the type of device (i.e. smoke, pull station) and the point’s status (i.e. alarm, trouble). The audible alarm shall sound once every 24 hours until the condition is cleared.


Page 16721 - 16 1232

b. Panel display shall include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

B. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (Transmitter) – Panel shall also include a digital

transmitter, acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL. Transmitter shall be integral to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).

1. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal

from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with Central Sta-tion(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the re-maining line.

2. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the Central

Station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

3. Local functions and display for the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter shall in-

clude the following:

a. Verification that both telephone lines are available. b. Programming device.

c. LED display.

d. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

e. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

4. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be equipped with DACT. Provide additional labor

and equipment as necessary to interface to the DACT or as standalone unit for the transmission of troubles and alarms to a central monitoring station at the direction of the Owner.

C. Telephone Lines - The Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter shall be connected to two

telephone lines provided by the Contractor. The FAS shall send signals, including trouble and system conditions, to the Owner’s (County) designated remote monitoring station via dedicated telephone lines, and provide a record of events which can be remotely ac-cessed.

1. The two telephone lines shall be connected for primary and secondary means of signal

transmission. Prior to connection to the telephone system, the Contractor shall verify the telephone system provides for timed-release disconnect and is provided with tran-sient voltage surge protection.


1233 Page 16721 - 17

2. A failure of either telephone line shall report a trouble condition at the FACP, all Re-mote Annunciators, and at the Central Station via the second phone line. Confirmation of the Fire Alarm Signal shall be accomplished by repetition of the signal, parity checks or equivalent checksum-type transmission. Digital data transmission via the Telephone Lines, from the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter shall include the following:

a. Address of the alarm-initiating device. b. Address of the supervisory signal.

c. Address of the trouble-initiating device.

d. Address of the alarmed monitor and relay device.

e. Address of the troubled monitor and relay device.

f. Zone of the troubled notification appliance circuit.

g. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.

h. Low battery.

i. Abnormal test signal.

j. Communication bus failure.

k. Ground fault.

l. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to

Central Station. D. Control Panel Wiring – Control panel wiring shall be type MTW, rated 600volts minimum.

1. Control panel wiring shall be fully dressed and bundled with nylon tie wraps at 3-inch

intervals. Bundled wiring shall be routed parallel to terminal strips within control panels, with individual conductors turned out at 90 angles to their associated termi-nal connections.

2. AC power conductors shall be bundled and routed separately from low voltage conduc-

tors. A minimum 2-inch separation shall be maintained between AC power conductors and low voltage conductors wherever possible.

3. All wires shall be numbered to correspond to the chart required by other sections of

this specification. Conductors looped around terminals are not acceptable. Installa-tion shall comply fully with the Manufacturer’s requirements for Power Limited Sys-tems and the location of circuit conductors within the control panel enclosure.


Page 16721 - 18 1232

4. The FACP shall not be used as a raceway. 5. Conductors that do not terminate within the control panel shall not be routed through

that control panel or through the primary trough, pull box or terminal cabinet above the FACP.

E. Primary Power - All AC power connections for the FACP shall be to a dedicated electrical

power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72. Each AC Circuit connected to the Fire Alarm System shall be provided an approved transient suppressor dedicated to the individual circuit only. Provide 120 volts ac service, transformed through a two-winding isolation-type transformer and rectified to low-voltage dc for operation of the fire alarm control panel and all associated devices.

F. Secondary Battery Power - Standby power supplies capable of supporting all dependent

devices and equipment as required shall be Sealed Lead-Acid. G. Surge Protection Devices - Surge protection devices (SPD) for alarm and communications

circuits shall be UL 497 listed as primary protectors. SPD’s for power circuits shall be UL 1449 listed.

2.7 REMOTE FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR (FAA) A. Description: Remote Fire Alarm Annunciator (FAA) functions and UL requirements shall

match those of Fire Alarm System Control Panel (FACP) for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of FACP, including acknowledg-ing, silencing, resetting, drilling and testing.

B. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA Type 1. Unless directed by the AHJ, location of the FAA

shall be as shown on Drawings. C. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights

shall match those of FACP. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

D. Construction: Requirements for control panel wiring, panel electronics, surge suppressor and power supplies for the FAA shall also match those of the Fire Alarm System Control Panel (FACP).

E. Programming capabilities of the Fire Alarm System shall remain only in the FACP. 2.8 PRINTERS A. General - Provide a system printer to record alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions

without loss of any signal or signals. Printout shall be by circuit, device, and function as provided in the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Printer shall be full color, 120vac with connections and cabling as required from the control panel to which they are connected.

B. Printer shall have at least 80 characters per line and have a 96 ASCII character set. The

printer shall have a microprocessor-controlled, bi-directional, logic seeking head capable of printing 120 characters per second utilizing a laser jet print head. Printer shall not


1233 Page 16721 - 19

contain internal software which is essential for proper operation. The printer shall have an indicator to alert the operator that the paper has run out.

C. When the FACP receives a signal, the alarm, supervisory, and trouble condition shall be

printed. The printout shall include the type of signal, the circuit or device reporting, the date, and the time of the occurrence. The printer shall differentiate alarm signals from other printed indications. When the system is reset, this condition shall also be printed including the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Provide a means to automatically print a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system. If a printer is off-line when an alarm is received, the system shall have a buffer to retain the data and it shall be printed when the printer is restored to service.

2.9 RACEWAYS AND CONDUCTORS

A. Conduit: All IDS conduits, junction boxes and pull boxes shall be furnished and installed per the requirements of SECTION - RACEWAYS AND BOXES.

B. Wire: Stranded copper conductors with color-coded insulation. Insulation type and marking shall be in accordance with NEC Article 760, furnish and install per SECTION – LOW VOLTAGE POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V). Wire sizes (AWG) shall be as follows:

1. Low - Voltage Circuits: No. 14 AWG, minimum, or as shown on the IDS System Manufac-turer’s Drawings.

2. Line - Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, or as shown on the IDS System Manufac-turer’s Drawings.

C. All Fire Alarm System Circuit Conductors, their method of installation, and the raceways

and supports utilized shall be per applicable Codes (including NFPA70 (NEC), NFPA72, NFPA101, NFPA1221), acceptable to AHJ and approved by the Fire Alarm System Manufac-turer. Circuit conductors for use with Non-Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuits, per NEC, shall be type NPLFP-CI, suitable for use in “other” space for environmental air and with the Circuit Integrity CI classification. Circuit conductors for use with Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuits, per NEC, shall be type FPLP-CI, suitable for use in ducts, plenums and “other” space for environmental air and with the Circuit Integrity CI classification.

2.10 REMOTE SHUTDOWN RELAY A. Fire Alarm System – connected remote shutdown relays: shall enable shutdown of building

air handler fans, exhaust fans, closure of smoke dampers, etc on alarm condition.

B. Wire relay coil as an output of the FACP. Relay contact shall be wired into the applicable (external) control circuit of the building fan. Contacts shall be 10 ampere (minimum), continuous, rated for making, breaking and carrying an inductive fan motor starter load.

C. Provide addressable interface module as required.

D. Shutdown relays shall be located remote from the FACP, at the applicable air handler

starter, other motor starter, smoke damper and/or other controller. 2.11 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY


Page 16721 - 20 1232

A. General: Components shall include nickel-cadmium-type battery, charger, and an auto-

matic transfer switch. Battery nominal life expectancy shall be two (2) years, minimum.

B. Battery capacity shall be adequate to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. At the end of this period, the bat-tery shall have sufficient capacity to operate the system, including alarm-indicating de-vices in either alarm or supervisory mode, for a period of 5 minutes.

C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide ca-

pacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining the batteries at full charge. In the event batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge them completely within four (4) hours. Charger output shall be supervised as part of system power supply supervision.

D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Shall transfer the load to the battery without loss of

signals or status indications when normal power fails. 2.12 SURGE SUPPRESSION A. All control and annunciator panels shall be equipped with lightning surge and transient

voltage surge suppression. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation: The Fire Alarm System shall be installed and wired completely by a trained

and Manufacturer certified installer, who shall make all necessary wiring connections to external devices and equipment.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in conduit, except as otherwise indicated. Cables shall be

concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. Wiring and connections shall be in accordance with equipment requirements and as needed for a complete and working system.

C. Pulling Cable: For Manufacturer’s supplied cable do not exceed Manufacturer’s recom-

mended pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between indicated termination, tap, or junction points. Re-move and discard cable where damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.


1233 Page 16721 - 21

D. Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support the cable according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring use numbered terminal

strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures. F. Grounding: Provide grounding as recommended by the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer

and as required by NFPA -70 (NEC). 3.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Manual Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48-

inches (1.2 m) above the finished floor. Mount within 5-feet (1.5 m) of exits per NFPA 72. B. Automatic Sprinkler System Water Flow and Tamper Switches. Connect for each sprinkler

valve station and header arrangement required to be supervised. C. Natural Gas Supply Shut-off Valve Relay: Furnish relay (if not supplied with valve) and all

connections, wiring and boxes required to install and monitor. D. Smoke Detectors: Install smoke detectors not less than 4-inches (10 cm) from a sidewall

to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4-inches, but not more than 12-inches (30 cm), below the ceiling. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors not over 30-feet (10 m) apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 60-inches (1.5 m) from air registers.

E. Heat Detectors: Heat Detector spacing, elevation and locations shall be set based on

equipment layout and detector Manufacturer’s recommendations. Heat detectors shall be installed in areas prone to dust, such as storage rooms, mechanical rooms, and electrical rooms. Place high temperature heat detectors in kitchen, especially near dishwasher where steam will set off smoke detectors.

F. Fire Alarm Notification Appliances (Horns and Strobes): Where ceiling heights allow, wall mounted appliances shall be mounted at heights above the finished floors of not less than 80 inches or 6 inches below the finished ceilings whichever is lower. Install Fire Alarm No-tification Appliances (Horns and Strobes) on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine audible and vis-ual alarms at the same locations into a single unit.

G. FACP and Remote Annunciators: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72-

inches above the finished floor. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT/ALIGNMENT/SYNCHRONIZATION/CLEANING A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by Manufacturer. Subse-

quent to installation, the Contractor shall clean each FAS System component of dust, dirt, grease or oil incurred or accrued from other project activities, and prepare for system ac-tivation fully in compliance with Manufacturer’s recommended procedures for adjust-ment, alignment, or synchronization.


Page 16721 - 22 1232

B. Each FAS System component shall be prepared in accordance with the appropriate provi-sions of the component’s installation, operations, and maintenance manuals.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Sec-

tion “Electrical Identification.” 3.5 GROUNDING A. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power

system and equipment grounding.

B. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with installation requirements of Division 16 Section “Grounding.”

C. Ground Equipment and conductor and cable shields. Provide 5 Ohm ground at main

equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. 3.6 DOCUMENTATION A. Contractor shall supply operation and maintenance manuals to aid the Owner in operation

of the Fire Alarm System. B. The Contractor shall supply a compact disc (CD) with complete schematic, interconnec-

tion diagrams and other documentation specified. CD for the Fire Alarm System shall be turned over to the Owner prior to system acceptance.

C. Contractor shall provide accurate Record Drawings. Record Drawings will indicate the

type, location, and where required shall address or otherwise make assignment of all Fire Alarm System devices and components.

D. At the location of all control panels and auxiliary power supplies, and a table indicating

which components are powered by the main panel and each auxiliary supply will be in-cluded. Contractor shall also provide typewritten and electronic format documentation, detailing the Fire Alarm System as delivered, including configuration data, programming data, and all other information required to restore the system to full operation.

3.7 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. Training: Before acceptance by the Owner, Contractor shall provide training and instruct-

ing operating personnel in how to program the Fire Alarm System and demonstrate a typi-cal operating program.

B. Programming and Set-up: The Contractor shall provide technical services and personnel

to perform Programming and Set-up functions for the Fire Alarm System. The completed and inspected Fire Alarm System shall operate as described in the Specifications. Coordi-nation with Owner’s personnel and other person’s needed is required to determine the Fire Alarm System functions shall be provided to the Engineer for approval prior to com-mencement of Programming and Set-up.


1233 Page 16721 - 23

C. Once each of the Fire Alarm System devices have been programmed to operate individual-

ly, Contractor shall provide forty (40) hours of system programming in co-ordination with Owner’s personnel and other person’s needed to coordinate these components into a functional system as directed herein.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, INSPECTIONS, TESTING, AND DEMONSTRATIONS

A. Fire Alarm System Manufacturer’s Field Representative: The Contractor shall provide ser-vices of a factory-authorized field representative to supervise the field assembly and con-nection of components and system pre-testing, testing, adjustment, and programming.

B. The Engineer shall have full opportunity to witness the required Contractor inspections or to conduct its own inspections of the installation.

C. Certification: The Contractor shall certify that all requirements of this specification have been met. The Engineer shall have full opportunity to witness the required Contractor in-spections or to conduct its own inspections of the installation. Certification will be through a written statement in accordance with verifications by inspection, test, and demonstration as described in the below paragraphs:

1. Verification By Inspection: Verification by inspection includes:

a. The examination of a device or system and the comparison of pertinent character-istics against the qualitative or quantitative standard set forth in the specifica-tions.

b. Inspection may require moving or partially disassembling the system components in order to accomplish the verification.

c. Inspection will be made of all equipment installations, mounting and wiring of electrical and signal distribution enclosures and components, and mounting and placement of sensors to ensure requirements of the specifications are complied with, and that the overall installation is accomplished in a professional and work-manlike manner.

d. Verify the units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

2. Verification By Test And Demonstration: The Contractor shall verify by formal test and demonstration, with the Engineer’s acceptance inspection, that the requirements of this specification have been met. Final testing and system programming shall be under the supervision of a factory-authorized field Representative.

a. Schedule and inform the Engineer, a minimum of 10 working days prior to perfor-mance of Contractor’s acceptance inspection.

b. Report: Submit a written record Engineer’s acceptance inspection of test results to the Owner within 5 working days of the test.

3. Pretesting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all components, wiring, and func-tions to verify they conform to specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or


Page 16721 - 24 1232

damaged items with new items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. The Contractor shall develop associated tests plans for approval by the Engineer prior to testing.

4. Operating Test - After the installation is completed and at such time as the Engineer may direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equip-ment will be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements specified. The test will be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor will furnish instruments and personnel required for the test.

5. Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify system con-forms to Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Methodically test for proper system operation in all functional modes.

6. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the specifications and complies with applicable standards. Provide a written record of all retest results to the Engineer within five (5) working days.

7. Preliminary Tests: Following installation, the Contractor shall individually test each sensor, device and system component, and verify the proper functioning of each sen-sor, device or system component. Each sensor, device and Intrusion Detection System component shall be similarly tested until all system interfaces have been verified. Any deficiency pertaining to these requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor prior to final Intrusion Detection System functional and operational tests.

8. Formal System Operation Test: Following completion of the Preliminary Tests and the Intrusion Detection System formal demonstrations, the Contractor shall conduct a Formal System Operation Test, in which all components and systems of the Intrusion Detection System are demonstrated to operate together as a system. This test shall be performed over a continuous seventy-two (72) hour period and shall be witnessed by the Engineer. A written, documentable test plan and test procedure for each por-tion of the test shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance with this specification. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the Intrusion Detection System components meet the Specification requirements in the as-installed operating environment.

D. Final Acceptance Testing and Inspection: Upon completion of the Contractor’s work, the Fire Alarm System shall be subjected to complete functional and operational tests.

1. When all required corrections have been accomplished, the system shall be re-tested and the Engineer notified in writing, twenty-one (21) calendar days in advance of the proposed Final Acceptance Testing and Inspection date.

2. Advance notice of Final Acceptance Testing shall include certification that the instal-lation is complete and operable, and has satisfactorily performed the final tests speci-fied herein.

3. The Final Acceptance Testing and Inspection will be accomplished in the presence of the Engineer. Fourteen days prior to that date, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval of the Engineer a complete and detailed final acceptance test


1233 Page 16721 - 25

check-off (punch) list. The list shall be a complete representation of all specified functions and conditions.

4. At the time of Final Acceptance Testing, all required tests shall be repeated, and all defects will be corrected, until the Intrusion Detection System is found to be accepta-ble to the Engineer. A log of all test activities and results shall be maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments, labor, and materials required for tests, the equipment Manufacturer’s technical representative, and a qualified technician to perform the tests.

5. Final Testing: Tests shall include the following:

a. Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

b. Test of all primary computer, workstation, and peripherals functions.

c. Test electrical supervision of all input/output sensor and data communication bus circuits.

d. Test of all alarm initiating devices.

e. Test all integrated systems interfaces.

f. Test all circuit supervision and self-testing systems.

g. Test batteries and battery chargers.

h. Complete operation tests under emergency power.

i. Visual inspection of all wiring.

j. Written certification that all required submittals have been provided and have been accepted.

k. Demonstration of Programming/Reprogramming and Set-up functions of all Intru-sion Detection System components.

l. Demonstrate methods and determining optimum alignment and adjustment of components and settings for system controls. Arrange to demonstrate adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the system and to train Owner’s personnel.

m. Schedule demonstration, training, and adjustment with at least seven (7) days ad-vance notice.

E. Manufacturer’s Representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion"

in accordance with the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Sys-tems", and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapters found in NFPA 72.


Page 16721 - 26 1232

3.9 RELIABILITY/MAINTAINABILITY DATA A. Contractor shall record the hours of component, subsystem and system operation, togeth-

er with failure and repair data. This information shall be incorporated into the Fire Alarm System Test Report to be submitted to the Engineer.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one (1) year of date of Substantial Com-

pletion, provide on-site assistance in tuning and adjusting the system to suit actual occu-pied conditions and to optimize performance.


SCCPSS – Security Vestibules Acceptance Testing & Calibration March 6, 2019

1233 Page 16999- 1

SECTION 16999 - ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section includes a Thermographic survey and the field testing, inspection and adjusting of all material and equipment installed. Other Electrical Sections covering individual types of equipment may have additional testing requirements.

B. The purpose of these specifications is to assure that all tested electrical equipment and systems are operational and within applicable standards and manufacturer’s tolerances and that the equipment and systems are installed in accordance with design specifications.

C. Testing specified herein shall be performed prior to substantial completion.

1.2 QUALITY CRITERIA

A. All field testing shall conform to the latest edition of “Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems” as published by the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) and shall be performed by an independent testing firm certified by NETA.

B. Items not passing test will be rejected and shall be repaired or replaced with acceptable new items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Inspect, test and calibrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions supplemented by this Specification.

B. Institute and maintain rigorous precautions for all test procedures requiring application of potentials above 30 volts, erect barricades around danger areas, post suitable warning signs and station watchman as necessary to ensure that unauthorized persons do not approach energized conductors. Maintain telephone or voice radio contact between potential source location and energized remote locations during any potential testing operations.

3.2 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Preparatory Work: Prior to testing, remove each breaker from its compartment. Clean, lubricate, inspect and adjust each breaker in accordance with manufacturer's


Page 16999- 2 1232

published maintenance instructions. Inspect contacts, arc quenchers, primary and secondary disconnects, current sensors, small wiring and trip devices. Examine contacts for condition, clearance, pressure and wipe.

B. Tests and data: Determine and record the following data:

1. Breaker identification, including Owner's designation, manufacturer's ratings, serial number, trip device type, ranges and time bands.

2. Test each breaker electrically for proper tripping characteristics by passing 60 Hz. sinusoidal low voltage current through each pole, one at a time, with test current injection at the primary disconnects. Adjust trip devices for required pickup characteristics. Perform tests at operating trip device settings as specified. Include this information in the report plus the record of the settings "as left" after calibration.

3. Apply sufficient current to actuate each mode of trip device, i.e., long time pickup, long time delay band, short time pickup, short time delay band, instantaneous pickup, ground pickup and ground delay band as applicable. Test current and elapsed time at tripping. For each pole, state whether or not breaker tripping is within the manufacturer's tolerances.

4. Perform insulation resistance test on each breaker. With contacts closed, apply 1000 volts DC and record readings after one minute energization between each pair of poles and from each pole to the breaker frame.

C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors. Test automatic molded case circuit breakers for acceptance prior to installation in circuit. Quantity to be tested is indicated below.

1. Thermal Magnetic Trips. (Breakers Only). Test breakers having thermal magnetic trips in a temperature controlled environment maintained at 40°C plus or minus 3°C. A temperature stabilization period of 15 minutes is required prior to testing the inverse-time automatic tripping characteristics. Test each pole of each breaker at 90% and 200% of its continuous current rating. Replace any breaker or trip device which trips within 10 minutes at 90%, or which fails to trip at 200% within the time indicated in the following table:

Rated Continuous Current, Amperes

Max. Tripping Time, Minutes

Breakers Tested per Panel or Switchboard

15 - 40 2 10% (NOT LESS THAN 2)

50 4 20% (NOT LESS THAN 1)

60 - 100 6 50% (NOT LESS THAN 1)

125 - 225 8 100%

250 - 400 10 100%

500 - 600 12 100%

700 - 800 14 100%

1000 16 100%

1200 18 100%


1233 Page 16999- 3

2. Instantaneous Trips. Test each pole of each breaker and motor circuit protector for automatic instantaneous tripping with slowly rising current. Replace any breaker or trip device which fails to operate within the following values:

a. Non Adjustable Trips - plus or minus 20% of fixed setting.

b. Adjustable Trips - plus or minus 10% of the high setting of the rms values of the instantaneous tripping current.

3. Motor Circuit Protectors after testing shall be placed in service at the minimum position which permits motor starting based on motor nameplate data following MCP manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS

A. Inspect and test motors and motor wiring, power and control for proper connection, circuit continuity, wire identification, insulation resistance and proper functioning or operation. Test insulation resistance from line to line and from each line to ground with a test instrument. Make tests prior to energizing circuits. Test motors for correct rotation. Test proper operation of starters and control devices. Record the nameplate data of motors for the selection of the proper overload relay heater size. Overload relay heaters furnished with equipment shall not be considered correct by virtue of the fact that heaters were so furnished and installed.

B. Test and inspect power distribution equipment for damage, defects and for proper functioning of all electrical and mechanical components. Test line and load bus, connections and conductors for test circuit breakers for proper electrical and mechanical operation.

C. Place motor circuit protectors in service at the minimum position which permits motor starting, based on motor nameplate data and following MCP manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 SPECIAL SYSTEMS

A. Exercise care in the testing of electrical systems so as not to damage special, electronic or instrumented circuits. Do not undertake to check or test special electronic or instrumented circuits beyond the manufacturer's instructions included with the equipment and performed for equipment installation. Test the continuity only for alarm, instrumentation, or similar special wiring systems prior to the final equipment connections.

3.5 INSULATION TESTS

A. Furnish the necessary test equipment and labor to test the insulation of electrical equipment and circuits before they are energized. Use a 500 volt "Megger" or other approved instrument, to test the insulation resistance of circuits insulated for 600 volts, associated motors and transformers, low-voltage motor control centers and low voltage switchboard.

B. Insulation Tests: Include, but are not limited to, the following:


Page 16999- 4 1232

1. Transformers: Test primary to ground, secondary to ground and primary to secondary.

2. Services: Test phase to phase and each phase to ground.

3. Cables: Test phase to phase and each phase to ground.

4. Motors: Test winding to ground.

5. Load Side of 600 Volt Circuits: Test each phase to ground and phase to phase.

6. Minimum Acceptable Megger Readings (Megohms at 20 C) for 600 volt class equipment:

a. Transformers Megohms

b. Primary to ground 20

c. Primary to Secondary 20

d. Secondary to Ground 5

e. Services - Motor Starters and Buses 20

f. Motors 1

g. Load side of 600 volt circuits less motor 20

C. Control power transformers, potential transformers and other devices connected phase to phase or phase to ground and any devices not designed to withstand the test voltages must be disconnected when testing insulation resistance in switchboard, motor control centers and other apparatus.

D. Keep written record of tests performed on forms approved for the purpose and turned over to Owner upon request, or at the termination of the Work. Identify each circuit or piece of apparatus tested, the date of the test, the temperature at the time of testing, the instrument used, the test voltage applied, the resistance values found and the name of the person in charge of and witnessing the test.

3.6 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

1. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.

2. Remove all necessary covers prior to thermographic inspection. Utilize appropriate caution, safety devices, and personal protective equipment.

B. Equipment to be inspected shall include all current-carrying devices.

C. Provide report including the following:

1. Description of equipment to be tested.

2. Discrepancies.

3. Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area.

4. Probable cause of temperature difference.

5. Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and/or unobservable areas and/or equipment.

6. Identify load conditions at time of inspection.


1233 Page 16999- 5

7. Recommended action.

D. Test Parameters

1. Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1°C at 30°C.

2. Equipment shall detect emitted radiation and convert detected radiation to visual signal.

3. Thermographic surveys should be performed during periods of maximum possible loading but not less than 40 percent of rated load of the electrical equipment being inspected. Refer to ANSI/NFPA 70B-1994, Section 18-16 (Infrared Inspection).

E. Test Values

1. Suggested actions based on temperature rise can be found in Table 10.18 of NETA Acceptance Testing specifications.

3.7 FINAL INSPECTION AND TEST

A. Upon completion of the various phases of the project, or at convenient times during progress of the Work, check and/or test as herein specified all equipment and wire installed.

B. Under no circumstances shall any part of the installation be operated by construction personnel without prior written approval of the Engineer. This restriction includes the checking of electrical motors for rotation.

C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work has been completed, including tests herein specified, Engineer's representative will give the entire work a thorough inspection. Any defects or omissions noted shall be corrected before acceptance of the work.

D. The inspections and tests to be made shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Visually inspect wires and cable connections including internal wiring of switchgear, transformers and other equipment.

2. Verify continuity of power and control conductors.

3. Make insulation tests as herein specified.

4. Check control circuits for short circuits and extraneous grounds.

5. Check equipment for proper mechanical adjustment and freedom of operation and removal of shipping blocks and/or stops.

6. Check closing, tripping, supervision and alarm functions of the controlled equipment.

7. Operate motor controllers, contactors, etc., from their control devices.

8. Check operation of alarm circuits.


Page 16999- 6 1232

9. Check motors for proper rotation and motor currents measured under load conditions. Any motor found to be operating incorrectly shall be inspected to determine the cause and the condition shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Furnish a record of these tests to the Owner.
